Home

Vertical SBX IP PC Admin 3.5

1. ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Sub Address 0 2 0 This field indicates how the sub address is used in the SETUP message 0 Station sub address not used 1 Sub address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP message 2 Sub address is filled in the CPSN Called Party Sub address Number field of SETUP DISA ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station is restricted to receive the DISA Restriction incoming call CLI Name ON OFF OFF If this field is ON the system checks whether the received CLI Display matches speed dial data If they match the speed dial name displays ISDN CLI STA Max 4 Logical If outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT this field used when digits STA No make outgoing CLI Progress ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON and an SLT seizes an ISDN line the progress Indication indication IE that indicates the originator is non ISDN device is made in the SETUP message ISDN CLIR ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON does not send CLI Information and restrict PX send it ISDN COLR ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON does not send CLI Information and restrict PX send it DID ON OFF OFF Restrict the DID Call Restriction DID Call Wait ON OFF OFF New DID Call waiting indicator CLI Type 0 1 0 1 Long Use station CLI with PGM114 BTN19 max 12 0 Short Use station CLI with PGM114 BTN12 max 4 Long Station Max 12 Logical If outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT this field used when CLI Digits S
2. Flexible DID Table PGM231 frd Refresh Close Enter Table Range Refresh All Range Refresh Index Name Day Type Day Dest Night Type Night Dest Weekend Type Weekend Dest Reroute Type 1 Not Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned 2 Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 3 Not Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned 4 Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 5 Not Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 6 Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 8 Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assianed Not Assianed Not Assianed Not Assianed Update Tool Index fi Name Update Delete All Initial All Delete Close Edit with Range Day Type Night Type Weekend Type Reroute Type Lunch Mode Type Not Assigned x Not Assigned vot Assigned 7 Assigned vot Assigned Day Dest Night Dest Weekend Dest Reroute Dest Lunch Mode Dest IJI JH D 5 5 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 1 129 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Flexible DID Table PGM 231 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID Name 1 11 Chars None Max of 11 characters Day Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 24
3. fe_ SystemHoldRecal Timer o so0t isec 0 300 15ec ACNRNo Answer ACNR Pause Timer 11 Retry Counter 12 ACNR Retry Courter 1 13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 1 300 1sec 14 Automatic CO Release Timer 20 300 1sec 15 CCR Inter Digt Timer o 255 100msec 16 CO Cal Drop Warring Timer o 99 1sec 0 99 1nir 18 CO Dial Delay jo 9 100mse 19 Co Release Guard Timer Ji 150 100msec 20 20 co Ring OFF mmer f10 150 100msec 60 21 CO Ring ON Timer rs 00mse 2 22 warmina Timer eo soo ise 10 e Enter a value within the range specified in the range box Refer to the following table for each timer Release 3 5 vEeRTICAL SBX PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 77 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers PGM 180 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Attendant Recall Timer 00 60 01 Establishes the amount of time before the system 2 digits min disconnects the call Call Park Recall Timer 000 600 120 Establishes the amount of time before a call placed in a 3 digits sec call park location will recall the station placing the park Camp on Recall Timer 000 200 030 If a station transfers to a busy station and hangs up this 3 digits sec recall timer is invoked Exclusive Hold Recall 000 300 060 Esta
4. 1 6 Site Management Tool 1 6 Basic Information 1 7 Level Management Administrator Only 1 8 User Management Administrator Only 1 10 LDK Utilities 1 11 Pre Programmed 1 12 Location Information 100 1 12 Slot Assignment PGM 101 1 14 Logical Slot Assignment PGM 103 1 15 Numbering Plan 104 105 106 107 109 1 17 IP Setting 108 1 19 Board Attributes 155 1 20 Station Base Program 1 20 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 20 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 1 30 Station COS 116 1 33 CO Group Access Station 117 1 35 Internal Page Zone Access PGM 118 1 36 Conference Page Zone 119 1 36 ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 1 37 Release 3 5 verTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 2 Preset Call Forward 121 1 38 Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 1 39 SMDR Account Group PGM 124 1 41 Copy DSS Button 125 1 44 Station
5. 2 10 Index Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin General Description I ntroduction to Online PC Admin The SBX IP PC Admin performs the Admin function on your PC instead of a keyset so that you can manage the functions more conveniently It performs all the function of keyset programming and runs on Windows NT 2000 XP Vista Hardware Software Requirements SBX IP PC Admin PC SBX IP MPB Software preliminary version Serial Port that is installed on MPB as a basic option Basic Serial Port Password for using PC Admin should be set in the MPB One IP Address should be set in the MPB for LAN Connection If you do not know the exact IP address ask your network administrator Available system SBX IP Office system Pentium Celeron 233MHz CPU or higher Celeron 333 or more high performance CPU is recommended 256 color Super VGA 800 X 600 or higher Recommended 1024 X 768 One or more Serial Port Mouse that has two or more buttons At least 64MB RAM 128MB or more RAM is recommended MS Windows NT 2000 XP NIC Network Interface Card for LAN connection and ability to connect to the network Optional MODEM for PSTN connection Optional Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Hardware Software Requirements 1 2 Cable Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin RS 232
6. 1 83 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 1 85 SMDR Attributes 177 1 86 System Date Time PGM 178 NotUsed 1 88 Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 3 Linked Station Pairs Table 179 1 89 System Timers Ill 180 181 182 1 90 In Room Indication PGM 183 1 96 Chime Bell Attribute PGM 184 1 97 DCOB System Attributes 186 1 98 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 1 100 Station Group 1 101 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 101 ISDN System Base Program 1 110 ISDN Attributes 200 1 110 COLP Table PGM 201 1 111 Tables 1 112 LCR Assignment 220 1 112 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 1 114 LCR DMT Table PGM 222 1 116 LCR Table Initialization 223 1 118 Toll Exception PGM 224 1 119 Canned Toll Table PGM 225 1 121 Emergency Code Table PGM 226
7. 2 33 Conference Page Zone PGM 119 2 33 ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 2 34 Preset Call Forward PGM 121 2 35 Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 2 36 SMDR Account Group 124 2 37 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 2 38 Station IP List for CTI PGM126 2 38 Station Mailbox Attributes 127 2 39 Virtual Mailbox Attributes 129 2 40 Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 6 Display Station with COS PGM 130 2 41 CO Group Access Station PGM 131 2 41 Hot Desk Attribute PGM 250 2 41 Line Base Program 2 41 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 41 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 50 CO CID Attributes 147 2 52 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 2 53 System Base Program 2 54 System Attributes 160 161 163 2 54 Admin Password 162 2 60 Attendant Assignment 164 2 60 Auto Attendant Annc Assignment PGM165
8. 2 61 CO to CO COS 166 2 61 DID DISA Destination 167 2 62 External Control Contact PGM 168 2 64 LCD Date Time Language Display Mode PGM 169 2 65 Modem PGM 170 2 65 Music 171 2 66 PBX Access Code PGM 172 2 68 PLA Preferred Line Answer Priority 173 2 69 RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 2 69 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 2 70 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 2 71 SMDR Attributes 177 2 71 System Date Time 178 Not Used 2 73 Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 2 74 System Timers III 180 181 182 2 76 In Room Indication PGM 183 2 82 Chime Bell Attributes 184 2 83 DCOB System Attributes 186 2 84 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 2 86 Station Group 2 88 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010
9. CO Line List PGM140 Normal Operation1 2 Normal You will see the adjacent window that 3 Normal displays CO line basic information a PGM140 Update Too 6 Nc ERR With this window you can select a linked 7 CO Attribute menu by selecting popup menu 8 Ring Assignment The following case is the window when you 9 Normal select the CO Attribute menu item in the 10 Normal popup menu Service Attribute Day vMIBMSGNofo Night Weekenc YMIBMSGNo o M DM VMIBMSGNolo Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 42 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 43 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation2 Several CO Attributes update 1 Change the admin field s you want in the CO Attributes window 2 Drag Drop several CO in CO List PGM140 to the CO Attributes Assignment area 3 Press the Update All button to update If you want another CO line press the Clear button av CO Attributes Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 44 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Service Type PGM140 ITEM REMARK Norm
10. Mobile Extension amp Bekesh SSj pdse ti Close Mobile Extension PGM 236 Idk Enable COGmNo Number 24 CU Max 16 Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 BIN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Mobile Ext Table Bin No 001 048 E 1 Mobile Ext Enable ON OFF OFF 2 Mobile Ext CO Grp 1 12 N A 3 Mobile Ext Tel No Max 24 N A 4 CLI Max 16 digits N A 5 Mobile Hunt Call ON OFF OFF 6 Voice MSG Wait Notice to ON OFF OFF Mobile 7 Usage ON OFF OFF Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Local Code Table PGM 204 2 125 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Local Code Table PGM 204 You can assign the local codes in this table The local code entered in this table will be deleted in SMDR print The telephone no with this code will not be recognized as a long distant call The available code value is numbers and digits 0 9 and is limited to a maximum length of 5 I ncoming CLI Destination Table PGM 237 An incoming DID destination can be associated with the incoming CLI If a CLI number is registered and assigned a destination within the Incoming CLI Destination Table all DID calls with this CLI will be routed to the corresponding destination Note This feature is supported only when the CO type is set as DID This feature is executed first when system receives a DID call with CLI PGM 237 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 CLI Number 001 100 2 Conversion
11. Refresh Close Current Station Copy To DSS PGM125 Flex Button Value 1 STA PGM BTN Individual Defined Key 2 STA PGM BTN Individual De 3 xx Button 1 4 xx Button 2 5 xx Button 3 Update Tool Flex Button Type Value 2 sta PGM BTN Individual Defined Key Update Close 4 Refer to the following table and select the type and value in the update tool Pressing Update displays the changed values If the data is not in the range specified in the table you will receive an error message Before you enter the new value check the data with the Station Attributes PGM111 window to avoid entering duplicated values Auto Increment means that you don t need to select the next index If this field is enabled and you press the Update button PC Admin will increase the Flex button index automatically So you can continue programming buttons without moving the cursor to next index from V3 only Auto Copy If this field is enabled you can copy a button to another button without deleting and reprogramming the same data For example Flex Button 10 has station 1000 and you want to move this PGM to BTN 11 Select Flex Button 10 and press the Update button with enabled Auto Copy Then PC Admin and the MPB will delete the function under Flex Button 10 and save the same data under Flex Button 11 Duplication is available with some PGMs Ex Loop button and some PGMs will no
12. 0 99 9631 N A OFF 3632 N A OFF 5 To modify the member right click the mouse in the Group Station Area The Group Station Area is the white field in below side of the windows Then you will see two menus Add Delete Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 92 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro e station Group scReftesh SJupdate Hose Station Group PGM190 Station Group Attributes PGMI91 o crop Type Frais r Type update Order Terminal Ring UCD Voice Mal Pickup nja VMIB Announce 1 Timer fis 0 999 sec Overflow Timer 150 0 600 sec Announce 2 Timer 2 0 999 se Wrap Up Timer p 2 999 se Announce 1 Location r amp 0 70 NoAnswerTmer 5 0 99 sec Announce 2Location 7 0 70 Pilot Hunt VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 0 999 5 Akif No Member Music Source Assigned X Alternate destination 111 Station Group Max Queued Call Count P9 0 99 3333333333233333323233333 6 To add the member enter the station range or station number in popup menu by selecting the Add Station If you want to change the order of members use the up down button on the right side Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 93 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Group Number 620 100 A
13. Station Mailbox Attibutes PGM127 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT Admin Disable Enable Disable COS 1 5 1 5 1 Announce Only Disable Enable Disable Announce Action Hang up Previous Previous Outbound Notification Disable Enable Disable Outbound Notification CO Group 1 24 1 Outbound Notification Tel Number 24 digits none Outbound Notification Retry 1 9 2 Outbound Notification Interval 1 60 minutes 3 Cascade Destination Station Virtual MB none Cascade Type NO cascading Imediately NO cascading When noti fails Urgent E mail Notification Off On Off Voicemail Password max 11 digits none SMTP Server IP XXX XXX XXX XXX none E mail Address max 50 characters none SMTP User ID max 24 characters none SMTP Password max 24 characters none W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 2 40 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 You can set up virtual mailboxes which are simply voice mailboxes that do not have a digital IP or SLT extension associated with it By default extensions 200 249 are the default virtual mailboxes Virtual Mailbox Attibutes PGM129 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT Admin Disable Enable Disable VMIB Access Disable Enable Disable COS 1 5 1 5 1 Announce only Disable Enable Disable Announce action Hang up Previous Previous VMIB MSG password Off On Off V
14. vertica SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 COLP Table PGM 201 1 111 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin COLP Table PGM 201 After you make an outgoing call through the ISDN line you can see the number you are connected with Operation Click COLP Table select a table index and click the Update Tool COLP Table PGM201 x Refresh Close Index COLP Digits a 0 1 C C I CO Update Tool Update Delete and next Index COLP Digits Bop o E Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Tables 1 112 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Tables LCR Assignment PGM 220 LCR is a function you can program to select the least costly CO line automatically for day night and any specified time zone The LCR table has four parts In PGM 220 you can program the general database LCR access mode day zone and time zone Operation 1 Click LCR Assignment 2 Select an LCR Access Mode LCR is not used M01 Only Loop LCR M02 Internal and Loop LCR M11 Loop and Direct CO LCR M12 Internal Loop and Direct CO LCR A duplicated day cannot be assigned for different day zones If you want to select Saturday for Day Zone 2 select Zone 2 in the SAT combo box For each day zone you set time of day The time also cannot be duplicated for each day zone 3 After programming press the Update button to save the
15. Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers Ill PGM 182 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station Auto Release 020 300 060 If a station hears ring back tone and no action is taken Timer 3 digits sec this timer is initiated When this timer expires the station is released Unsupervised Conference 00 99 10 Establishes the amount of the time an unsupervised Timer 2 digits min conference can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited the conference Wake up Fail Ring Timer 00 99 20 After a Wake up fail ring invokes on the System 2 digits sec Attendant the alarm ring continues during the length of this timer If this timer expires the Alarm ring will terminate Warm Line Timer 01 20 05 User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing the Wink Timer Enblock Int Digit Timer CCR Time Out Timer DID Inter Digit Timer FAX Tone Detect Timer FAX CO Call Timer 2 digits sec SPEAKER button and the warm line timer expires then the idle line selection for warm line is activated 010 200 010 The Time Duration of Seize Acknowledge Signal to DID 3 digits 10ms line 01 20 15 After timer expires Setup is sent 2 digits sec 000 300 010 When this timer expires CCR is activated 3 digits sec 01 20 05 This timer is used for the DID type 2 feature In DID type 2 digits sec 2 the SBX IP system will wait for new DID digits to be received until this timer expires or the call
16. 00 16 VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone 380 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 VOIB Slot for RSG IP Phone VOIB slot assignment for RSG IP Phone 2 RSG IP Channel Assign N A Port Number for RSG IP Phone PGM 381 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 RSG No 0 8 0 2 00 16 00 The IP Phone number to be serviced from the system Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 2 134 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 The following allows you to set the attributes of the RSG IP Phone Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro RSG IP Phone Attribute c Refresh Update Close RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM382 Unicast Transfer Mode Lasting Mode Remote Y Tone Generation G 711_ALAW Codec Type Peer to Peer Iv FiistAccessRSGCO Ring w o Ring amp ssign M RSG IP Phone Attributes PGM 382 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Transfer Mode IP or MAC IP 2 Casting Mode Unicast or Unicast Multicast 3 Tone Generation Remote RSG IP Remote Phone 4 Peer to Peer ON OFF ON 5 Codec Type G 711 ALAW 0 G711 ULAW 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 G 729A 4 G 711 ALAW 0 Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Phone Attribute 386 2 135 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro RSG IP Phone A
17. 1 Station ID amp Attribute Window 2 CO ID amp Attribute amp Ring Window e Restore window e Click from No 1 to No 10 to restore e From 1 to 10 you can save 10 window positions e Save Procedure e Click the Save Current Desktop button and then click the OK button e Delete Procedure e Click the Delete Saved Desktop button Select the Delete XX button to delete Close All Child Window To close all sub windows click this button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 2 13 DB File List Not Used Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro DB File List Not Used This window shows information about the DB file that is located in the data directory The data directory is located in the main folder Usage Select the DB File and click the Load File button or double click the File icon i OB Lis PEE sees mip set Drectory D Wrecapo Wi pe Aew PCodnineroWdets Information Display Area Operation result message is displayed here This area is at bottom of the program Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 2 14 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Pre Programmed You can change admin values such as Location Information Slot Assignment Numbering Plan etc Pre Programmed items are from 100 to 109 Click on in the Menu List t
18. 2 1 Introduction to Offline PCAdminPro 2 1 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 5 Hardware Software Requirements 2 1 Version Compatibility 2 2 Installation of the Offline PCAdminPro Software 2 3 Remove Software 2 6 Run Program 5 5 5 2 6 Procedure for using Offline PCAdminPro 2 6 Detail Program Information 2 7 Launcher Window 2 7 Sub Window 2 8 Basic Operation 2 9 Options Window 2 11 Desktop eet eee 2 12 DB File List Not Used 2 13 Pre Programmed 2 14 Configuration 100 103 2 15 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 2 18 IP Setting 108 2 21 Board Attributes 155 2 21 Station Base Program 2 22 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 22 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 2 31 Station COS POM 118 2 32 CO Group Access Station 117 2 33 Internal Page Zone Access PGM 118
19. ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Auto Pickup ON OFF OFF If a hunt member is ringing another hunt member can pickup automatically by pressing the SPEAKER button or by going off hook All Ring ON OFF OFF When a hunt member that is in TONE mode is ringing all the other stations are ringing also The Auto Pickup feature must be set before All Ring is set Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ISDN System Base Program 1 110 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ISDN System Base Program To change the ISDN related features you use PGM200 PGM202 ISDN Attributes PGM 200 You can change the ISDN attributes using this menu Operation 1 Click ISDN Attributes ISDN Attributes PGM200 Bie Es Refresh update Close Advice OF Charge Do not Service AOC CO ATD Code 2 CLI Print Int l Access Code Max 4 Digits My Area Code Max 6 Digits My Area Prefix Code Max 4 Digits Maintain DID Name PC Application Station 2 Referto the following table enter the data then click on Update to save your input ISDN Attributes PGM 200 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO ATD Max of 2 According to 114 Btn 5 CO ATD code or Extension digits number can be attached to the CLI COLP message My Area Code Max of 6 Local Area Code digits My Area Prefix Code Max of 4 Prefix Code of Local Area Code digits Release 3 5
20. _Goup Nanber20 croup Type preis I ick atte Circular Terminal Ring UCD Voice Mad Pickup VMIB Announce 1 Timer I 0 999 sec Overflow Timer 180 0 600 sec VMIB Announce 2 Timer 2 0 999 sec Wrap UpTimer p 2 999 sec Announce 1 Location i 0 70 NoAnswerTimer 5 0 99 sec Announce 2Location 7 0 70 Pilot Hunt VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 0 0 999 sec AkfNoMember L Music Source Assigned Alternate destinationf111 Station Group Max Queued Call Count 9 0 99 Group Station 100 Q 103 9 106 Q 109 Q 101 Q 104 107 Q 110 Q 102 Q 105 Q 108 Q 111 Q Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 96 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 9 To delete the assigned station group select the Group Type as N A and press the Type Update button Then press the Update button Station Group Attributes PGM191 Group Number 620 Group fi Terminal Ring uco v VMIB Announce 1 Timer fiso 0 600 VMIB Announce 2 Timer D p 2 999 sec VMIB Announce 1 Location ick swe is 0 99 sec VMIB Announce 2 Location VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 0 0 999 sec Akif No Member VMIB Announce 2 Repeat E Music Source Assigned PR Alternate destination 111 Station Group Overflow srA GRP Max
21. 103 A 101 104 A 102 105 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Release 3 5 W veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 94 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 7 delete the member select the Selected item delete menu SeRetresh Station Group PGM190 Station Group Attributes PGMI91 GoupNumberEzo Group Type forcuar Type Update Pick up attribute T Crodar Terminal Ring UCD Voice Mat Pickup VMIB Announce 1 Timer is 0 999 5 Overflow Timer 180 0 600 Announce 2 Timer 2 0 999 s Wrap UpTimer e 2 999 se WMIB Announce 1 Location D 0 70 NoAnswerTimer 5 0 99 sec VMIB Announce 2Location 0 70 Pilot Hunt VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer O 0 999 sec Akif No Member VMIB Announce 2 Repeat r Music Source Assigned Akernate destination111 Station Max Queved Call Count 29 0 99 109 A 110 A 111 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 95 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 8 When you complete the modification about the station group press the Update button e Station Gri up seRefresh update rtiClose Station Group mm Station Group Attributes PGM191
22. 112345678 None None None None None 2 Click a cell to edit 3 Type in data Type before every data entry for example 5 not just 5 When you write CO Line Type write CO Line CO Group and None keeping an empty space between CO and Line between CO and Group When you edit with Microsoft Excel you must add to make data as text type Otherwise Speed Editor cannot convert your data from an Excel file to edit window Do not exceed 16 characters when entering the Speed Name Do not exceed 24 characters when entering the Phone Number Recommend editing in Speed Editor View Release 3 5 XA veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Index A ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 1 162 2 144 ACOBS Rx Gain Control PGM 405 2 138 ACOB Rx Gain Control PGM 404 1 156 2 138 Admin Password PGM 162 1 71 2 60 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 2 60 Attendant Assignment and DVU Announcement Number PGM 164 165 1 72 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 1 123 2 114 Auto Attendant VMIB Annc Assignment PGM165 2 61 B Basic Information 1 7 Basic Operation 2 9 Board Attributes PGM 155 1 20 2 21 Brief Outline of PC Admin 1 5 C Canned Toll Table PGM 225 1 121 2 112 Chime Bell Attributes PGM 184 1 97 2 83 CO CID Attributes PGM 147 1 62 2 52 CO Group Access Station PGM 117 1 35 2 33 CO Group Access Station PGM 131 1 49 CO Line Base Program 1 50 2 41 COLP Table
23. 4 Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 24 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attributes PGM111 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Auto Speaker ON OFF ON Allows accessing a CO line or placing a DSS call by pressing an Selection appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting the handset or pressing the SPEAKER button Call Forward ON OFF ON Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station DND ON OFF ON Enables DND to be activated by the station Data Line ON OFF OFF ON protects from override and camp on when in a busy state Security Howling Tone ON OFF ON The allowance to give howling tone to an SLT to SLT ICM Box ON OFF OFF Allows receiving ICM box Doorbox signal Signaling No Touch ON OFF ON The allowance to connect the transferred CO line automatically when Answer station mode is set to H P Page Access ON OFF OFF Allows access to paging by the station Ring Type 0 4 0 The station can give its own ring type signal to another station in the system through this field calling party centric Speaker Ring 1 3 1 Station rings through 1 Speaker 2 Headset or 3 Both speaker amp headset Speakerphone ON OFF ON ON allows operation with Speakerphone VMIB Slot 0 2 0 Assign VMIB logical slot the station uses ICM Group 1 5 1 Assign the ICM Tenancy Group to which the statio
24. CO Line DTMF PULSE DTMF Signal Type Flash Type GROUND LOOP LOOP UNA ON OFF OFF The allowance of Universal Night Answer service CO Line ON OFF OFF Group Account CO Tenancy 0 5 5 Tenancy Group of CO line Group CO Line Attributes PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line ON OFF OFF If CO Line name is assigned at BTN2 and Name Display this field is ON CO name is displayed for CO incoming calls CO Line Max 12 characters Metering Unit 00 06 00 There are 7 metering signal types 0 None 1 50Hz 2 12 KHz 3 16 KHz 4 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 5 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 6 No Polarity Reverse NPR Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 46 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Line Attributes PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Line Drop ON OFF OFF If this field set to ON CPT checks the Using CPT incoming CO line when answered and if CPT detects dial tone then the system drops the line for toll restriction CO Distinct 0 4 0 The CO can have a specific ring signal to Ring stations in the system through this field s setting This ring type can be programmed at PGM422 CO Line MOH 0 9 1 0 Not assigned by this field 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 Reserved 4 8 SLT MOH 9 HOLD Tone PABX CO Dial YES NO YES YES PX or PABX provides dial tone Tone NO
25. Contents TOC 7 Station Group Assign 190 191 2 88 ISDN System Base Program 2 103 ISDN Attributes 200 2 103 COLP Table PGM 201 2 104 Tables eee EP BEER SE EE Eme 2 105 LCR Assignment 220 2 105 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 2 107 LCR DMT Table 222 2 108 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 2 109 Toll Exception 224 2 110 Canned Toll Table PGM 225 2 112 Emergency Code Table PGM 226 2 113 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 2 114 Customer Call Routing 228 2 115 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 2 117 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 2 118 System Speed Zone 232 2 120 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 2 121 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 2 122 Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 2 124 Local Code Table 204 2 125 Incoming CLI Destination Table 237 2
26. Group Station 11213 4 5 1 y 3 Putan attendant station number for the ICM Tenancy Group you have just selected 4 Click each ICM group check box that you want to access 5 After all changes press the Update button to save changes Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Preset Call Forward PGM 121 1 38 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Preset Call Forward PGM 121 If a station does not respond to an outside call for a certain period of time the call may be forwarded to another station Operation 1 Click Preset Call Forward Then programmed preset call forward pair will be displayed 2 If there is no pair data the window will not display anything Preset Call Forward PGMES P m I3 Refresh Close Station Value 100 STA 101 101 STA 102 Update Tool Station Type Value as DE 3 Enter the station range at the top of the window then click on Refresh to display stations that you may wish to preset call forward within the range 4 To edit the preset forward pair right click in the area under the headings in blue of Station Type and Value then click on the Update Tool button 5 In the Update Tool panel enter the station number that you want forwarded click on the Type arrow to get the dropdown menu then select either station or hunt group 6 Enter the station number or hunt group number in the Values box A
27. LD AII Call LD The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls or only long distance calls exceeding the time limit set by SMDR Start Tmr The long distance calls are identified by SMDR long distance code programming Btn 15 Records in Detail ON OFF ON Due to limited system memory size in places where many calls take place the SMDR record buffer can easily become saturated So if the customer doesn t need the detailed call information but total call total metering count and total cost for individual station then it is possible to save only the total accumulation rather than the detailed records in their entirety Print Incoming Call ON OFF OFF If this option PIC is setto ENABLE all incoming calls are printed with either all outgoing calls or long distance calls Print Lost Call ON OFF OFF If this option PLC is set to ENABLE all lost calls are printed whether unanswered or not SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0 9 xt According to this value the SMDR digits symbol will be hidden in the SMDR Currency Unit 3 Char For easy identification of call cost the currency unit can be input with 3 alphabetic characters to be printed in front of the call charge amount SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse 6 digits This is the call cost unit per cost metering pulse which is sent from the Central Office SMDR Fraction 0 5 This value represents the decimal positio
28. Operation After changing the nation you must save the database file and upload it to the SBX IP system Also you have to reset the system without DB protection At that time Dip S W 4 must be set to the ON state For another admin modification you download the changed database file Slot Assignment PGM 101 The SBX IP system supports 10 slots This program assigns each slot to one type of the boards After changing the Slot Assignment you must save the database file and upload it to the SBX IP system and then reset the system For another admin modification Station CO etc you download the changed database file Logical Slot Assignment PGM103 This area of programming sets up COL board STA board and VMIB Operation If any board is preset automatically by the system it shows the boards on the dialog box 1 Add the slot to a location on the right side of the dialog box If you select the Station board assign the slot to the station window 2 To change the order of slots use Up and Down button to change the order of the boards 3 After editing press the Update button to save change values Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Configuration 100 103 2 17 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 4 To remove a board select a slot number belowthe COL board STA board or VMIB and click the delete button Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admi
29. Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Account Group PGM 124 1 42 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin SMDR Account Group PGMI24 zal Refresh Close Account Group 1 Station Update Tool Station Account Group z Update START END Account Group ss Update Close 4 Enterasingle station number in the top of the Update Tool or a range of stations in the bottom of the Tool and choose the account group for assignment Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Account Group 124 1 43 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 5 Click on the associated Update button then click on the Refresh button SMDR Account Group PGM124 x Refresh Close Account Group 1 Station Update Tool 101 Station Account Group 102 103 2 104 Update 105 106 107 START END 108 101 110 109 Account Group 1 10 tm Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 1 44 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Copy DSS Button PGM 125 The assigned DSS buttons of a DKTU can be copied to another station or ICM group This does not apply to the DSS Box Operation 1 Click the Copy To DSS button 2 Enter the station number and select the type of destination You can select one of two types of destination One destination i
30. 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 and or in similar or successor clauses in the FAR or in the DOD or NASA FAR Supplement Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States Contractor manufacturer is Vertical Communications Inc 10 Canal Park Suite 602 Cambridge MA 02141 2249 Release 3 5 June 2010 REVISION HISTORY Release Date Documentation Changes Page No 3 5 06 10 Station Mailbox feature was added PGM127 1 45 amp 2 39 Virtual Mailbox feature was added PGM129 1 47 amp 2 40 Voice Mailbox COS feature was added PGM238 1 138 amp 2 125 3 0 09 08 Speed Editor chapter added 2 1 2 0 07 08 Offline PC Admin chapter added 2 1 1 0 01 08 Initial Release NOTE that this document contains information ISDN DCOB and SMS These features are currently not supported Information pertaining to DID pertains only to SIP Trunking Release 3 5 June 2010 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Contents Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin General Description 1 1 Introduction to Online PC Admin 1 1 Hardware Software Requirements 1 1 Installation of the Online PC Admin Software 1 3 Brief Outline of PC Admin 1 5 Password 1 5 Connection Type
31. 1 122 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 1 123 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 1 125 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 1 127 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 1 128 System Speed Zone 232 1 131 Weekly Time Table 233 1 133 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 1 134 Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 1 135 Local Code Table 204 1 136 Incoming CLI Destination Table PGM 237 1 137 Voice Mailbox COS PGM238 1 138 Networking Programming 1 139 Networking Attributes 320 PGM321 1 139 Networking CO Line Attribute 322 1 141 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 4 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 324 1 143 VolB Programming 1 145 VolB Programming PGM 340 1 145 Gate Keeper Programming PGM 341 1 146 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 1 147 RSG IP Phone Programming 1 150 VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone PGM 380 1 150 RSG IP Phone Port Number Assignment
32. Exist Exist Found allowed Found denied Not found check deny Not found allowed table Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Toll Exception PGM 224 2 111 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation Click Toll Exception Select table allow or deny ption Table update Close Toll Exception Table PGM224 Allow A I Deny Deny B Allow B Allow C Deny Allow D Deny D Ind Value NGEX MAX 14 Digits Include D is Don t Care 123123 Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Canned Toll Table PGM 225 2 112 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Canned Toll Table PGM 225 The Allow Deny Tables are organized to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site You can set the Allow Deny Table which is applied to station COS 5 6 The number of entries in a table is 20 and 14 digits maximum including any number 0 9 Operation Click Canned Toll Table then select ALLOW or DENY Canned Toll Table PGM 225 ITEM ENTRY DEFAULT REMARK ALLOW 01 20 Max digits 14 DENY 01 20 Max digits 14 Canned Toll Table SUupdate Close Canned Toll Table PGM225 Allow Deny Id Value X MAX 14 Digits Include D is Don t Care Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Emergency Code Table PGM 226 2 113 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Emergenc
33. GK Out of Band FLASH wmemew No Delay TOS Gk Time ToUve 30 0 250 se VOIBH323 1D 23ch 1 Throughput TOS ems VOIB E164 adea Relbiby TOS z VOIB Terminal Aas 20dot Traca Password pa Firewall IP Address pooo 1 NU PGOD Q VOIB Mode xs x ts Use Silence Detect OSP Use Echo Cancelation Mode DNNNNENN SIP Jtter Buffer 150 so 300 ms amp Monitoring C Operation 1 Select the VolB board number If selected board number is not VOIB the program will display error message This menu is valid only for VOIB 2 After selecting the board number press the Refresh button The first time the whole data are the default value It is the same as Network Setting PGM108 to enter the IP address gateway address subnet mask For the correct value you should ask the network administrator about this information You should ask the network administrator for the DNS address Trace password is 10 digits password for tracing data Numeric value and characters are all available up to 10 digits 3 To save the data press the Update button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 2 127 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 SIP Attributes Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 2 128 C
34. ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line 00 25 01 Groups should be assigned according to Group CO type and Class Of Service CO COS 1 5 1 CO COS 1 no restriction CO COS 2 Exception Table A governs CO COS 3 Exception Table B governs CO COS 4 restricts Long Distance Code CO COS 5 overrides STA COS 2 3 4 and 5 6 DISA Account ON OFF ON When accessing another CO line in the Code system by DISA line you should enter authorization code if this flag is set CO Line POL LOOP LOOP Polarity Reverse Loop Start Assign CO Line Type PBX CO CO When marked PBX a 1 or 2 digit dial code may be entered after which toll restriction is applied CO Line DTMF PULSE Signal Type Flash Type GROUND LOOP LOOP UNA ON OFF OFF The allowance of Universal Night Answer service CO Line ON OFF OFF Group Account WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 55 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Attributes I PGM141 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Tenancy 0 5 5 Tenancy Group of CO line Group Emergency ON OFF By If this value is set to ON the designated 911 Usage default CO Line is active for E911 use CO Line 01 is ON and other CO Lines are OFF CO Line Attributes Il PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line ON OFF OFF If CO Line name is assigned at BTN2 and Name Display this field is ON CO name is d
35. MODU Rx Gain Control PGM 411 Release 3 5 XA verTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 MODU Rx Gain Control PGM 411 2 139 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Other Gain Table PGM 412 418 424 2 140 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Other Gain Table PGM 412 418 PGM 424 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Tone Frequency 420 2 141 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Tone Frequency PGM 420 User entered frequency dial tone ring back tone error tone busy tone dummy dial tone may be changed to the closest system frequency stem Tone Frequency im X efresh update Close System Tone Frequence PGM420 provided Dial Tone T1 Dial Tone T2 OHZ Ring Back Tone T1 425Hz Ring Back Tone T2 OHZ m Busy Tone T1 oz R Busy Tone T2 OHZ Error Tone T1 620 2 Error Tone T2 OHZ bed Dummy Dial Tone T1 ssorz Dummy Dial Tone T2 s40nz System Tone Frequency PGM 420 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Dial Tone 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring Back Tone 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Busy Tone 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Error Tone 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Dummy Dial Tone 0000 9999 1 2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 W v
36. Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Mobile Extension Table 236 1 135 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 Mobile Extension PGM236 Refresh Close Index Enable CO Grp Tel Number CLI Station Mobile Hunt Call Voice MSG Wait Usage DISABLE 100 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 101 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 102 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 103 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 104 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 105 OFF OFF OFF DISABLE 106 OFF OFF OFF Update Tool Index CO Grp Tel Number Station P FEE I Mobile Hunt Call Voice MSG Wait Notice to Mobile Usage Update Delete Close Mobile Extension Table 236 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Mobile Ext Table Bin No 001 048 1 Mobile Ext Enable ON OFF OFF 2 Mobile Ext CO Grp 1 12 N A 3 Mobile Ext Tel No Max 24 N A 4 CLI Max 16 digits N A 5 Mobile Hunt Call ON OFF OFF 6 Voice MSG Wait Notice to Mobile ON OFF OFF 7 Usage ON OFF OFF Release 3 5 WX vERTICAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Local Code Table PGM 204 1 136 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Local Code Table PGM 204 You can assign the local codes in this table The local code entered in this table will be deleted in SMDR print The telephone number with this code will not be recognized as a long distant call The available code value is numbers and digits 0 9 and is l
37. Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 78 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers PGM 180 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001 300 030 This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and the 3 digits sec system considers the CO party as busy in the case that the CPTU cannot detect a valid tone type until this timer expires Automatic CO Release 020 300 030 An uncompleted CO call will be automatically released Timer 3 digits sec after this timer expires CCR Inter digit Timer 000 255 030 This field is used for the CCR inter digit timer in the 3 digits 100ms DISA DID CO line In DID type 2 it is used for the DID inter digit timer CO Call Drop Warning 00 99 10 If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO Timer 2 digits sec conversation give warning tone and after this time the call will be disconnected This timer is also used for Call Restriction Unsupervised Conference Reserved CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 01 Voice connection to the outside party will be made after 2 digits 100 this timer This can be used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office Line or PBX CO Release Guard Timer 001 150 020 The CO Release Guard Timer controls the time 3 digits 100ms necessary to guarantee idle loop state when the line is released CO Ring Off Timer 001 150 060 This time
38. W VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide Release 3 5 Vertical Communications Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content without notice 2010 by Vertical Communications Inc rights reserved This publication contains proprietary and confidential information of Vertical Communications Inc The contents of this document may not be disclosed copied or translated by third parties in any form or by any means known or not now known or conceived without prior explicit written permission from Vertical Communications Inc LIMIT OF LIABILITY DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Vertical Communications Inc makes no representation or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the content of this publication and specifically disclaims any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose and shall not be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage including but not limited to special incidental or consequential TRADEMARKS Vertical Communications and the Vertical Communications logo and combinations thereof are trademarks of Vertical Communications Inc All other brand and product names are used for identification only and are the property of their respective holders RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure of the technical data contained in this document by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c
39. 0 99 Digit Modification Table PGM 222 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Bin Number 00 99 Added Digit Stream 25 digits None Normal digits 0 9 Special characters CALLBK Pause DND FOR Dial tone detection instead of pause FLASH Billing code Extension Number Removal Position 01 12 01 Index to CD stream in Lead table to be removed Number of Digits to be 00 12 00 Remove digits in CD stream up to this amount Removed Add Position 01 13 01 Establishes the position of the CD stream after removal where the stream will be inserted CO Group 01 24 01 Establishes which CO group is used for LCR dialing Alternative DMT Index 00 99 None Establishes an alternative DMT index when there is no idle CO line in CO group LCR Table I nitialization PGM 223 It initializes Day Zone 1 2 3 in LDT and all CO groups in DMT Operation 1 Click LCR Table Initialization Click Day Zone 1 3 Select a DMT index 0 99 then press the Initialize button to initialize 2 Select a CO group 1 24 and Click the Initialize button that is located below Initialize CO Group area 3 Select an alternative DMT index 1 99 and click the Initialize button of the Initialize Alternative DMT Index area 4 Click Initialize All LCR Table to initialize all LCR tables Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Toll Exception PGM 224 2 110 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Toll Exception PGM 224
40. 1 59 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM143 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Double CLI If this value is Service ORI the real Calling Party CPN is Number displayed If Service this value is Transit Transit Point CPN is displayed Prefix Table Ukraine only Not Used Index Deny ON OFF OFF Incoming Call ICLID Usage ON OFF OFF CO Line Attributes III PGM146 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Incoming ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON a prefix code will Prefix Code be attached in front of incoming CLI Insertion Outgoing ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a prefix code will Prefix Code be attached in front of outgoing CLI Insertion ISDN Line u Law A Law A Law _ This value is used to set the ISDN CODEC Type Type Calling Sub ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the calling party Address sub address of the ISDN station is attached when an ISDN station makes an outgoing CO Call through this CO Line DID DGT 2 4 3 This value is used as count of the received Receive DID Digit number to route DID incoming Number Call vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 60 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Attributes III PGM146 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID Digit 4 digits When the DID Conversion Type PGM 143 Mask FLEX4 is set to 0 the received DID digits are co
41. 109 M 110 M 111 M 112 M 113 M 114 M 115 M 116 M 117 M 118 M 119 M Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 2 75 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation 1 Select a station number and enter a station number to be linked with 2 Linkthe pair by clicking Add To delete a pair click Delete button Then information will display A character for addition and D character for deletion Linked Pairs Refresh S4update Close Linked Pair List PGM179 Master 113 M slave 213 Add Delete All Link Clear 100 M 101 M 102 M 103 M 104 M 105 M 106 107 M 108 M 109 M 110 M 111 M 112 M 113 M 114 M 115 M 116 M 117 M 118 M 119 M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 To adapt the changed pair Add Delete click Update 4 f you want to clear all linked pair click All Link Clear Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 76 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers I 111 180 181 182 You can set the system timers to control the interval of time that each event occurs Operation m Timers xc Refresh update close System Timers PGM180 182 Mme few 1 Attendant Recall Timer 0 60 1min i 2 Cal ParkRecalTmer osoo tsec campon Reca Tmerr o 2o0 1sec 0 300 15 S_ LHoldRecall Timer
42. 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Station IP List for CTI PGM126 The SBX IP does not support CTIU for a CTI link Instead of CTIU you can make a CTI connection with a LAN connection To use this feature you must enter the IP address of the PC s that you want to use with CTI For example if you use station 100 and your IP address is 10 0 0 5 then you should enter this table with station 100 and IP address of 10 0 0 5 You can enter this mapped table up to the max station numbers of the SBX IP The limitation is dependent on the lock key that is installed on SBX IP system Release 3 5 vertICcAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Mailbox Attributes 127 2 39 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Mailbox Attributes PGM 127 You can provide a mailbox with administrative options to perform common tasks associated with the VM This mailbox may also be used to record a broadcast message that is delivered to all mailboxes in the system There are no limits on the number of mailboxes that can be marked as administrators e Only 1 mailbox can be active in the administration area at a time Operation Once the System Administrator assigns Admin Rights the user can perform additional mailbox funtions 1 6 for all active mailboxes in the system Add delete a mailbox reset a password record a greeting broadcast message MB name
43. A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group No Answer Destination When there is no answer input a station group to be forwarded TONE A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group External Control Contact PGM 168 Loud Bell Control Door Open and External Device Control can be set to use an external control contact The contact feature is ranged from 1 to 4 A default value is not assigned Operation 1 Right click and select Update Then you will see the following window 2 After editing press the Update button on the update panel to save changes 3 Select one of the control contacts 4 n case of Loud Bell Control you should indicate a station to be assigned External Control Contact PGM158 lOl xl Refresh Close Contact No Contact Assigned Value Mot Use 0 Not Use n Not Use 0 Not Use 0 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCD Date Time Language Display Mode 169 1 76 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin LCD Date Time Language Display Mode PGM 169 You can set a different time date language display on the LCD Date Time Language Display PGMi6 Refresh 3jupdate Close LCD screen Operation 1 Click LCD Data Time Language Display LCD Time Di
44. IP Setting PGM 108 You must enter a valid IP Setting to transport data remotely through the network Operation IP Name has no meaning at all It can contain up to 15 characters You can put the hostname if you lol x want In that case it is not a real hostname Refresh update close optional i IP Setting PGM108 The Server IP Address is the IP address of the SBX IP system The IP address is assigned by the IP Name 123456789012345 network administrator If you don t want to use the network connection you can skip this feature If you Server IP Address 19216857220 want to use the network connection you must CLLIP Address 0 0 0 configure this feature Client CLI IP Address optional GateWay IP Address 192 168 57 254 _ The Gateway Address is the IP Address of the SUBNET Mask 255 255 255 0 gateway that the system uses If you don t enter the gateway s IP Address you can t access the SBX IP PPP Usage system from another LAN segment that is Separated by a router or a 3 layer switch Subnet Mask is set to 255 255 255 0 by default Board Attributes PGM 155 You can program the board attributes of equipped boards Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Base Program 2 22 Station Base Program Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Use Station Base Program to change any station related function Station Base Program items are from PGM 110
45. PC Admin Guide June 2010 Other Gain Table 1 158 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Other Gain Table Operation 1 Click Other Gain Table 2 Editeach field in the dialog box In this window there are 8 PGM features PGM Other Gain Table PGM412 413 414 415 416 417 418 424 412 418 and 424 So you can edit these fields at one time PIS x Refresh S4uUpdate Close Short SLIB Gain PGM 412 SSLIB 5 ACO 32 SSLIB L ACO Long SLIB Gain PGM 413 LSLIB 5 ACO LSLIB 32 Far SLIB Gain PGM 414 F SLIB 5 ACO 2 FSLIB L ACO Short Gain PGM 415 SACO 5 SLIB 32 SACO L SLIB SACO F SLIB SACO DKT 26 Long ACO Gain PGM 416 LACO 5 SLIB LACO L SLIB LACO F SLIB LACO DKT DTIB Gain Table 424 5 DKT jaz MBU DSP Rx Gain PGM417 acosms 24 smsjpco e sitsms 7 ACODTMFCIDf38 acorskcp fs MBU FSK Tx Gain PGM418 smsjaco 2 sws pco e sitsms p stra 2 Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Tone Frequency 420 1 159 System Tone Frequency PGM 420 A user entered frequency dial tone ring back tone error tone busy tone dummy dial tone may be changed to the closest system frequency available Operation Click SYSTEM Tone Frequency and select the numbers as desired Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Ad
46. PGM 186 In this menu you can program the attributes of R2 DCOB These menus consist of combo boxes Operation After selecting the item and changed value press the Update button to save the value This feature may not apply to some countries it currently is not supported in the USA DCOB System Attributes Refresh SJUpdate Close DCOB System Attribute PGM186 Line Status B v R2 OUT Manage Timer sec 14 Calling Category fi R2 IN Manage Timer sec fis CLI Digt Num R2 Disappear Timer sec 14 01 50 Metering Type R2 Pulse Timer 20msec F 01 30 DNIS Service R2 Ready Timer 20msec F 000 500 R2 Error Prompt Usage Dial Tome Delay Timer Eo 01 30 R2 Busy Prompt Usage R2 Out Digi Timer sec E 01 50 R2 Annc Prompt Usage DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DCOB CO Type 0 2 2 0 Sweden Cyprus This is actually 1 Italy programmed in PGM 187 2 Korea Australia FLEX 4 Metering Type 0 1 0 0 Not used 1 When a Metering signal is received R2 OUT Manage Timer 01 50 14 In R2 signaling maximum time for waiting for forward sec signal from PX R2 IN Manage Timer 01 50 14 In R2 signaling maximum time for waiting for forward sec signal from PX Release 3 5 W vertica SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 2 85 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMA
47. Plus Code Max 3 Digits 4 Click on the Update button to save your data 5 Click on the SIP Attr 2 button MM Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 1 149 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Q SIP Attribute 2 Refresh Close VOIB Setting SIP Attr 1 Index User ID Authentication User Name Authentication User Password Contact Number User ID Registration user ID Usage asc Stn 2 Provision OFF 3 Provision OFF 4 Provision OFF 5 Provision OFF 6 Provision OFF 7 Provision OFF 8 Provision OFF 9 Provision OFF 10 Provision OFF 11 Provision OFF 12 Provision OFF 13 Provision OFF 14 Provision OFF Update Tool Index Contact Number User ID Registration Provision UserIDUsage Asc Stn Update User ID Authentication User Name Authentication User Password Authentication User Password Repeat 6 Enter the following as appropriate User ID Authentication User Name and Authentication User Password can be entered as text data and as a number The maximum length of these fields is 64 characters type of Contact Number must be a number otherwise PC Admin will display an error message Authentication User Password Repeat is used for confirming the user password If there is no user password this field should be empty But if a password exists you should enter the same value in this Repeat field 7 Click on the
48. STA 100 is Enabled by default VMIB Access ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE allows access to the Digital Voice Unit DISABLE Group ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to use group listening While you are Listening DISABLE talking on handset by pressing the SPEAKER button other persons around you may hear the conversation through the speaker of the key telephone Override ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to override a CO line to gain access to the Privilege DISABLE conversation SMDR Hidden ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to hide CO dialing numbers from SMDR Dialed Digits DISABLE printing Voice Over ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to use Voice Over feature DISABLE Warm Line HOT WARM This field is determined that Warm Line OFF or Hot Line ON in WARM PGM 122 VMIB MSG ON OFF OFF ON allows the station to use VMIB MSG Password attributes Password VMIB MSG ON OFF ON The allowance to use VMIB MSG Date Time ALARM ON OFF OFF Basic Alarm Attribute Mute Ring ON OFF ON Mute Ring Service configuration Service Call Cut Off 00 99 00 If the timer expires the call is released and the user receives a Timer disconnect tone Barge In Mode 0 2 0 0 OFF 1 Monitor Mode The intruding extension can listen to the existing conversation but cannot participate 2 Speech Mode The intruding extension can listen to and join to the existing conversation Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID
49. Toll tables are used to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls for the stations assigned STATION COS Exception table A amp B allow the station that is programmed in STA COS 2 3 amp 4 to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site Each allow deny table may contain up to 30 number strings All bins of allow and deny tables have no entries by default Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any number 0 9 Don t care The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow Deny Tables Ifthe tables have no entries no restriction is applied If entries are made in the allow table and only there then only those numbers are allowed If entries are made in the deny table and only there then only those numbers are denied fthere are entries in both tables the allow table is searched at first and if number is found it is allowed If not found the deny table is searched and if number is found it is denied If it is not found in either table it is allowed Allow Deny Rules PGM 224 ENTRY CONDITIONS amp RESULT ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE Not Exist Not Exist No Restriction No Restriction Exist Not Exist Found allowed Not found denied Not Exist Exist Found denied Not found allowed
50. Update button to save the Busy Tone T1 ON 100 0 255 20ms 0 255 20ms 0 255 20ms changes Busy Tone 2 OFF D 255 20ms Error Tone T1 ON 0 255 20ms Error Tone T2 OFF 0 255 20ms S Dial Tone T1 ON 150 0 255 20ms S DialTone T2 0FF jo zsstzoms ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring Back Tone 000 255 ON 100 OFF 200 20ms base Busy Tone 000 255 ON 025 OFF 025 20ms base Error Tone 000 255 ON 012 OFF 012 20ms base S Dial Tone 000 255 ON 150 OFF 000 20ms base Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Initialization DB Init 1 163 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Initialization DB I nit The system has been pre programmed with default data These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized The system should be always initialized when installed or at any time the database has been corrupted To initialize the system to the default values proceed as follows Operation 1 Click Initialization 2 Press one of the buttons shown below to initialize Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Initialization DB Init 1 164 Note Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin It is recommended that you do not use a USB Serial converter It may produce a communication error between the SBX IP and the PC Initialization PGM450 452 Close Flexible
51. X Night Ring Mode Range wort Type Station Station Number Hunt Group Hunt Group Number VMIB 1 70 Drop 1 70 System Speed 2000 4999 Internal Page 1 30 External Page 1 3 All Call Page 1 3 NET 055 CONF RooM 1 9 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID Name 1 11 Chars None Max of 11 characters Day Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT_ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT_ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Release 3 5 A vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 2 119 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Flexible DID Table PGM 231 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Night Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Weekend Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Reroute Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT_ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT_ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 125 Ext Page 1 All
52. en re M Select Board Empty Board 2 H i B R I D C 200 e Port Setting Logical Assignment Station Data View Board Attribute SLIBS SLIB16 HYBRID SLIB4 SLIB12 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Logical Slot Assignment PGM 103 1 15 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin To assign board manually choose one of the slots and a board type When you use this feature you can not modify the logical port number except for the DCOB When you assign the DCOB you can select the logical port number that you want It has range from 0 to 30 ports Any board except the DCOB has a fixed logical port number If you want to see the attributes of an installed slot you can select the View menu in above window When you select an empty board menu a confirmation window will be displayed and will ask once more to avoid a mistake Logical Slot Assignment PGM 103 The COL board and STA board is assignable either automatically or manually If the dipswitch is off they will be assigned automatically otherwise manually The VMIB is assignable only manually regardless of the dipswitch status Operation 1 Select the Logical Assignment in Rack Slot Assignment Setting Window Figure 1 1 If any board is preset automatically by the system it shows the boards on the dialog box 2 Add the slot to the appropriate location on the right side If you select the St
53. fo 0 32 Call Forward V Error Tone for TAD a DND v SLT Flash Drop Data Securty Loop LCR ACNT n Howling Tone to SLT V VMIB Slot fo 1CM Box Signalng wismsetype uro gt atl ST OTMF 1 WHTU No Touch Answer v OFFNET Forward iv 113 WHTU Page Access Forced HF r Staton Information 108 Ring Type o CIDSLT CAS GAIN 0 20 frome s Speaker Ring Speaker cipsitrskGain 5 0 20 Associated Station Number Speskerphone v Caller V OVER r Station Attributes Assignment Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 2b Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Attributes PGM111 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Auto Speaker ON OFF ON Allows accessing a CO line or placing a DSS call by pressing an Selection appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting the handset or pressing the SPEAKER button Call Forward ON OFF ON Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station DND ON OFF ON Enables DND to be activated by the station Data Line Security ON OFF OFF ON protects from override and camp on when in a busy state Howling Tone to ON OFF ON The allowance to give howling tone to an SLT SLT ICM Box Signaling ON OFF OFF Allows receiving ICM box Doorbox signal No Touch Answer ON OFF ON The allowance to connect the transferred CO line aut
54. menu from the popup menu or when you click on the CO Attr tab CO Line Attribute I PGM141 Refresh Close CO Num COList coattem coattrm q CO COS DISA Account Code Line Assign Type Signal Type Flash Type UNA ON co CO CO Group LOOP DTMF LOOP OFF COS1 ON LOOP CO DTMF LOOP OFF COS1 ON LOOP CO DTMF LOOP OFF COS1 ON LOOP CO DTMF LOOP OFF You can select the attributes that you want to check and modify by right clicking on the data portion of the window and then clicking the Update Tool button CO Line Attribute I PGM141 Refresh Close conum 1 COList coIspNattr CO Num Group CO COS DISA Account Code CO Line Assign CO Type CO Signal Type Flash Type UNA CO Group Account 2 DTMF LOOP OFF LOOP X OFF Update Tool CO Group CO Signal Type DTMF 7 Update v cocos cosi Flash Type P 1 v DISA Account Code UNA Close CO Line Assign Loop Group Account OFF a Select All Vv v CO Type co JV Tenancy Group o v Emergency 911 Usag OFF This is same architecture for PGM 142 143 146 147 Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 54 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Attributes PGM141
55. 1 Select the VoIB board number If the selected board number is not the VOIB PC Admin will display an error message This program is valid only for VOIB After selecting the board number press the Refresh button Then PC Admin will receive the information about the selected VOIB Upon initial entry all data are default values The same as Network Setting PGM108 enter the IP address gateway address and subnet mask Ask your network administrator for correct values Ask your network administrator for the DNS address Trace password is 10 digits and it is used for tracing data Numeric values and characters are all available up to 10 digits You cannot see the password data for security To save the data press the Update button To erase the data press the Update button with the field blank Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Gate Keeper Programming PGM 341 1 146 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Gate Keeper Programming PGM 341 You can program the Gate Keeper with this window Because the GateKeeper is related with the VOIB this program is included in PGM340 VOIB programming So if you select the VOIB slot number the VOIB and GateKeeper data will be displayed OIB GateKeeper Setting PGM340 341 Refresh Supdate Close SIP Attr 1 SIP Attr 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 GK Usage GK Address 0 0 0 0 GATEWAY Address 0 0 0 0 GK Call Mode Direct GK Find Address 224 0 1 4
56. 1 represents 5 seconds the system will wait this value to 1 digit bsec decide NO TONE 3 represents 15 seconds Only for CIS Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 1 92 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers PGM 180 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001 300 030 This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and the 3 digits sec system considers the CO party as busy in the case that the CPTU cannot detect a valid tone type until this timer expires Automatic CO Release 020 300 030 An uncompleted CO call will be automatically released Timer 3 digits sec after this timer expires CCR Inter digit Timer 000 255 030 This field is used for the CCR inter digit timer in the 3 digits 100ms DISA DID CO line In DID type 2 it is used for the DID inter digit timer CO Call Drop Warning 00 99 10 If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO Timer 2digits sec conversation give warning tone and after this time the call will be disconnected This timer is also used for Call Restriction Unsupervised Conference Reserved CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 01 Voice connection to the outside party will be made after 2 digits 100ms this timer This can be used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office Line or PBX CO Release Guard Timer 00
57. 163 1 68 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Attributes 1 PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Network ON OFF OFF If this field is ON the system time date are Time Date Set by the network time date Setting PX Time Day Month Off Hook Ring MUTE BURST MUTE The system off hook ring type can be Type programmed to mute or one burst ring Override 1st ON OFF ON If this field is set to ON and if there is CO Group available CO line in the 1st CO group the system accesses the next accessible CO group Page Warning ON OFF ON If desired the page warning tone can be Tone suppressed Auto Privacy ON OFF ON The system can be programmed to override a CO line call to gain access to the conversation If privacy is disabled a station privileged to override in PGM113 Btn 4 joins an existing call in progress Privacy ON OFF ON If desired the privacy warning tone can be Warning Tone suppressed Single Ring YES NO NO Changes a cadence of ICM or incoming for CO Call CO ring In case of NO ICM 1sec on 4sec off CO 0 45 on 0 25 off 0 4s on 4sec off In case of YES the cadence is the reverse Reserved 105 Enable disable ACD Print features Enable unit OFF ACD Print 001 255 001 Determines the amount of time between Timer repeated ACD database prints Zero means no print out 10 sec base A vertical SBX IP PC Admin
58. 2010 Canned Toll Table PGM 225 1 121 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Canned Toll Table PGM 225 The Allow Deny Tables are organized to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site You can set the Allow Deny table that is applied to station COS 5 6 The number of entries in a table is 20 and the entries can be up to 14 digits including any number 0 9 Operation Click Canned Toll Table Select ALLOW or DENY Canned Toll Table PGM 225 ITEM ENTRY DEFAULT REMARK ALLOW 01 20 Max digits 14 DENY 01 20 digits 14 Q Canned Toll Table PGM225 Puclose Allow Deny Index Value Max 14Digits D is don t care 4 1 C C Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Emergency Code Table PGM 226 1 122 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Emergency Code Table PGM 226 Regardless of STA COS an emergency call can be made through a service code You can make 10 service codes for emergencies Operation Click Emergency Code Table Emergency Code Table PGM226 e x Refresh Close Index Value Max 14Digits D is don t care Cc on CO Update Tool Index Value Max 14Digits 4 D is don t Update Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Authorization Code Table PGM 227
59. 2010 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 1 17 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Numbering Plan Type PGM 104 105 106 107 109 The default range of the station numbers is from 100 to 131 You can change the range according to the nation or to fit your style But there is information that you have to remember Note If you change the numbering plan type when you are using the PC admin you have to reload the flexible number plan Station number PGM 105 information If you don t reload that information range information will be faulty Operation 1 Click Numbering Plan menu in left main menu Then you will see the below screen With this window you can program all kinds of numbering plan You can change the station range from any position When you select All Station Delete a confirmation window will be displayed and will ask once to avoid making a mistake Numbering Plan PGM104 109 loj Refresh close Numbering Plan Type Number Set Tvpe 1 Flexible Station Number Flexible Station Number Port Station Number Attribute Value Value 1 100 Station Group Pilot START END 620 629 2 101 Internal Page Zones START END 501 510 3 102 Internal All Call Page 543 4 103 544 5 104 External Page Zone 1 545 B 105 All Call Pagefinternalfexternal 549 106 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 8 107 Flash Command To CO Line 551 g 108 SLT Last
60. 3 5 hw VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Sub Window 2 8 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Sub Window CAdminProWdata S00_3 Oat usr Fre Frorammed Station Ease Program O Line Base Program System Bata Pre gram Station Group P3M199 191 E ISON System Basa Progam Tables Network RSGJIP Fhone Programmi co Naon Speci Pile name is D WPcapp Wi DE When PCAdminPro 3 05 Data is losded to memory successfully __prot_pom_str_deta bt area arranged peace m col dara areas pisi E UploadiDosanioad PC Application version is 65 00 C040 MP Version is 00 306 C OAK Work Space When you select the admin menu the information window of the admin field will be displayed in this area Menu Load File You can load file e Save File You can save file Options You can change program environment Desktop To memory window position and size and bring back anytime Exit Menu List The Admin Menu is displayed Search PGM No You can run admin window by inputting PGM Number directly Search You can run admin window by inputting the string of admin menu Information Display Area Operation result message is displayed here Status Bar The Status Panel shows the final displayed result message Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Basic Operation 2 9 Bas
61. 4 Destination 5 Destination 6 Destination 7 Destination 8 Destination 9 Destination Not Assigned VMIB Not Assigned Station VMIB Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 10 Destination Not Assigned Busy Destination Error Timeout Destination No Answer Destination ba v b bal v v d Ma m Yv tud m L 3 Ld Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 1 126 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Customer Call Routing Table PGM 228 TYPE DIGIT TYPE RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station Station 2 Hunt Group Hunt 3 VMIB Announce 4 VMIB DROP Announce 5 System Speed 2000 2499 6 Internal Page 1 5 7 External Page 1 8 All Call Page 1 9 Net Number Valid Net A valid net number must be entered Networking programming must be done to use this field 10 Conference 1 9 Room Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Executive Secretary Table 229 1 127 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 There are a number of Executive Secretary pairs available for assignment so that when the executive designated station is in a DND state intercom calls and transfers will be automatically routed to the designated secretary
62. 78 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Operation 1 Click Music 2 Refer to the table below and set the values ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK BGM Type 0 8 01 00 No BGM 01 Internal Music 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 MOH Type 0 9 01 00 Not Assigned 01 Internal Music 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 09 Hold Tone ICM Box Music 0 8 01 00 No BGM 01 Internal Music Channel 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 Assign SLT Flex 1 5 SLT MOH 1 5 MOH SLT STA No Dial Tone 0 5 0 N A To assign external dial tone set the SLT Source station number of the SLT port ICM Ring Back 0 5 0 N A To assign external ICM tone set the SLT Tone station number of the SLT port Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Music PGM 171 1 79 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID CO Ring 0 5 0 N A To assign external DID ring back tone set the Back Tone SLT station number of the SLT port Internal MOH 00 12 00 00 Romance Type Romance 01 Turkish March 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Greensleeves Fur Elise Carmen Waltz Pavane Sichiliano Sonata Spring Campanella Badinerie Blue Danube Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 PB
63. Announce 2 Timer VMIB Announce 1 Location Announce 2 Location Announce 2 Repeat Use Announce 2 Repeat Timer b 0 999 Overflow Destination Not Assigned Overflow Timer Hunt Group Name Hunt Call Coverage Mode s o 999 Wrap Up Timer 0 999 No Answer Timer b Pilot Hunt b o 706 ALT if No Member 0 600 Member Forward 1 Queue Count Display Delay Ring Cycle Music Source Alternate Destination Not Assigned Max Queued Call Count 0 99 b o s You use the Attribute Assign button to change the data that is already programmed Station Group Type PGM 190 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Group Type 0 7 0 0 Not assigned 1 Circular 2 Terminal 3 UCD 4 Ring 5 VM 6 Pick up 7 Net VM Pick up Attribute ON OFF OFF OFF Member Assignment Not Group Type must be assigned first Assigned Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 104 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Circular Terminal Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec system announces the greeting if one exists VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec System announces the V
64. Baud CTS RTS ON OFF OFF P Break ON OFF OFF LPP 001 199 060 You can change the usage of the print serial port You can change the various input port for application Note The PC Admin port is only displayed and you can t change the value If the PC Admin port is COM1 COM2 for PC application PC Admin PC Attendant CTI you can t use those ports COM1 COM2 as normal terminal ports during use of PC Admin Except for PC Admin you have to change the ports related with the PC application to DEFAULT VALUE Network before you use those ports for normal usage Trace SMDR Printing If you do not change those values the system may experience problems Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 1 84 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Operation 1 Click Print Serial Port Selection Q Print Serial Port Selection PGM175 F x Refresh update Close Off line SMDR Statistics Print Admin Print row e Traffic ow YS SMDI Print ow ez Call Information Info On line SMDR ow o 1 sl o rl PC Admin Auto Select PC Attendant wr PcaTOD v Nec Remote Diagnostic NETREMOTE E 2 Refer to the following table and change the values Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio 176 1 85 Note Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 If th
65. CO line by default Operation Click CO Group Access Station Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin This feature has the same operation as Station COS You can see the accessible group base station list If you wants to see the stations which are accessible to group 1 select the CO group number 1 and press the Refresh button Then stations that can access CO group 1 will display CO Group Access Station PGM117 131 goix SBeftesh Close CO Group 1 Station Number Update Tool Station Get I lt lt lt Update Start 101 z a et Update ee update os CO Group Access Group 1 Access Group 2 Access Group 3 Access Group 4 Access Group 5 Access Group 6 Access Group 7 Access Group 8 Access Group 9 Access Group 11 Access Group 21 Access Group 10 Access Group 12 Access Group 13 Access Group 14 Access Group 15 Access Group 16 Access Group 17 Access Group 18 Access Group 19 Access Group 20 Access Group 22 Access Group 23 Access Group 24 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Internal Page Zone Access 118 1 36 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Internal Page Zone Access PGM 118 Each station can be assigned to an internal paging zone Yon can assign a station in a number of zones or no zone at all If a station
66. COL CD 12 digits None To be compared with the dialed digits by a user DMT Index Each value 00 99 None Day Zone 1 2 3 has 3 time zone DMT indexes 6 digits Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR DMT Table 222 1 116 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin LCR DMT Table PGM 222 PGM 222 is the Digit Modification Table Operation 1 Click LCR DMT Table and select DMT 0 99 2 Click the Update Tool The following dialog box appears LCR DMT Table PGM222 r0 x Refresh Close Add Diaits Max 25Digits Removal Num Of Digits Add CO Alternative Include i D P F Position to be removed Position Group Index D Tone Detect P Pause F Billing Station 1412 O 12 1 13 1 24 O 99 99 4 Index 123 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OO WO 5 N lt e M A 0 O e D 1 Update Tool p Removal Num Of Digits Add co Alternative Position to be removed Position cs DMT Index Delete Close Added Digit Stream 25 Digits in maximum Removal Position Select a position to remove 1 12 Number of digits to be removed Select the number to be deleted 1 12 Add Position Select a position to be added 1 13 xor ms R
67. Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers Il PGM 181 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SLT DTMF Release Timer 00 20 00 2 digits sec 3 Soft Auto Release Timer 01 30 05 2 digits sec VM Pause Timer 01 90 30 2 digits 100ms Transit Connect Timer 01 30 04 2 digits sec VMIB MSG Rewind Timer 01 99 05 2 digits sec LCO Connect Timer 00 20 00 2 digits sec LCO CPT Detect Timer 00 20 05 2 digits sec Forward to VMIB Timer 20 60 20 If the Auto FWD to VMIB feature PGM 113 FLEX 14 is 2 digits sec set to a station the call is automatically forwarded to VMIB after this timer expires so the caller can leave a voice message System Timers Ill PGM 182 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SLT Hook Switch Bounce 01 25 01 This timer establishes the length of time that is needed to Timer 2 digits 100ms regard as a valid on hook or off hook for SLT SLT Maximum Hook 001 250 050 This timer establishes how long the user could depress Flash Timer 2 digits 10ms the hook switch in order for it to be considered a FLASH Timed Break Recall for SLT SLT Minimum Hook Flash 000 250 020 The minimum bound time that system considers as a Timer 3 digits 10ms hook flash for an SLT SLT Ring Phase Timer 2 5 5 Determines the ring phase of SLTs 1 digit sec 5 SEC 1 SEC ON 4 SEC OFF Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 81
68. Check data will be displayed 3 If selected board is not DCOB12 a message box will display that says The selected slot is not DCOB12 Station Base Program Use Station Base Programming to change any station related function Station Base Program items are from PGM 110 to PGM 131 amp 250 When you use station base program items you must enter the station range Station ID Assignment 110 111 112 113 114 This menu is related with assigning the phone type for each station First select the station list In this window you can select other menus such as station attributes or flex button assignment Operation 1 Click Station List Q Station List PGM110 111 112 113 114 Refresh Close Station Number All Apply FLEX BTN Assign STA Attr I STA Attr II STA Attr III STA Attr IV Station Station Name Station Type Associated Station CD First Name CD Last Name 101 DKTU 102 CID SLT Type FSK Update Tool 103 CID SLT Type FSK 104 CID SLT Type 5 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 125 105 CID SLT Type 5 zd ile I PGM 111 106 CID SLT Type FSK Atribute IL PGM 112 T CID SLT Type FSK Station Attribute III PGM 113 Station Attribute IV PGM 114 108 CID SLT Type FSK tiun Sava ina CIM CIT Tone Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 21 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC
69. Connection Menu 2 4 Editing Data 2 8 File Menu 2 3 File Transfer Menu 2 6 Full Screen Layout 2 2 Hardware Configuration 2 1 Hardware Software Requirements 2 1 Installing Software 2 2 Introduction 2 1 Uninstalling Software 2 2 Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Index IND iv Station Base Program 1 20 2 22 Station COS PGM 116 1 33 2 32 Station Group 1 101 2 88 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 101 2 88 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 20 2 22 Station IP List for CTI 1 44 Station IP List for CTI PGM 126 2 38 Station Mailbox Attributes PGM 127 1 45 2 39 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 65 2 54 System Base Program 1 65 2 54 System Date Time PGM 178 Not Used 1 88 2 73 System Speed Zone PGM 232 1 131 2 120 System Timers I III PGM 180 181 182 1 90 2 76 System Tone Frequency PGM 420 1 159 2 141 T Tables 1 112 2 105 Tip for backup and restore of user database 1 10 Tip for backup level database 1 9 Toll Exception PGM 224 1 119 2 110 Tx Rx LED 1 7 U User Management Administrator Only 1 10 V Version Compatibility 2 2 Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 1 47 2 40 VMIB Rx Gain Control PGM 407 1 156 2 138 VolB Programming PGM 340 1 145 2 126 VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone PGM 380 1 150 2 133 Voice Mailbox COS PGM 238 1 138 2 125
70. IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 390 392 394 396 2 137 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro RSG RX Gain Control PGM 390 392 394 396 The RX gain on the RSG can be adjusted s Belesh 530 rt Close RSG Rx Gain Control PGM39 Comment Value Range 0 63 OVU DTMF TONE Musict Music2 RsG DKT RSG_SLT RSG_LCO IP_PHN 2 2 22 22 26 44 40 38 40 40 32 32 38 37 37 37 37 32 32 33 29 32 23 23 22 22 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 391 393 395 397 The TX gain on the RSG can be adjusted ASG Tx Gain Control lt Reftesh Update Close RSG Tx Gain Control PGM3SX Comment Value Range 0 63 Ts wr su oswa eco ow 26 133 33 29 26 33 26 33 22 33 23 26 33 22 33 23 26 33 22 33 29 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Nation Specific 2 138 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Nation Specific You can control transfer sensitivity of another station or CO line for each kind of phone PGM 400 to PGM 423 These values depend on Nation Specification DTI B Rx Gain Control PGM 400 SLI B Rx Gain Control PGM 401 SLI B12 Rx Gain Control PGM 402 WTI B Rx Gain Control PGM 403 ACOB Rx Gain Control PGM 404 ACOBS Rx Gain Control PGM 405 DCOB Rx Gain Control PGM 406 VMI B Rx Gain Control PGM 407 DTRU Rx Gain Control PGM 408 EXT Page Rx Gain Control PGM 409 CPTU Rx Gain Control PGM 410
71. IP List for CTI PGM 126 1 44 Station Mailbox Attributes 127 1 45 Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 1 47 Display Station with COS 130 1 49 CO Group Access Station 131 1 49 Hot Desk Attribute PGM 250 1 49 CO Line Base Program 1 50 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 50 CO Ring Assignment 144 145 1 61 CO CID Attributes PGM 147 1 62 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 1 63 System Base Program 1 65 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 65 Admin Password PGM 162 1 71 Attendant Assignment and VMIB Announcement Number PGM 164 165 eee ee ee eee eee 1 72 CO to CO COS 166 1 73 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 1 74 External Control Contact PGM 168 1 75 LCD Date Time Language Display Mode PGM 169 1 76 Modem 170 1 76 Music 171 1 77 PBX Access Code PGM 172 1 80 Preferred Line Answer PLA Priority PGM 173 1 81 RS 232C Port Setting 174 1 82 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175
72. Numbering Plan Initialization LCR Database Initialization Station Database Initialization Other Tables Initialization CO Line Database Initialization Flexible Button Program Initialization System Feature Database Initialization Networking Data Initialization Station Group Database Initialization All Database Initialization ISDN Tables Database Initialization System Reset By Software System Timer Database Initialization DID Reroute Table Initialization Toll Table Database Initialization Board Data Initialization Init er 2 0 Init er 2 5 Init er 3 0 Init er 3 5 Init Enblock Prefix Table Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Print Database 1 165 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Print Database To obtain a hard copy printout of the database a printer must be connected to the RS 232C connector Print Prot Data PGM 451 Operation Click one of the buttons below to get a hard copy Print PROT Data PGM451 cose Flexible Numbering Plan LCR Database Station Database Other Tables CO Line Database Nation Specific Database System Feature Database Flexible Button Program Station Group Database All Database ISDN Tables Database System Timer Database Networking Data Toll Table Database Print Quit Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Print Prot Data 451 1 166 Ch
73. Online PC Admin Chime Bell Attribute PGM 184 This window assigns Chime Bell attributes Master and slave are the extension number and relay should be assigned with each bin number Bell timer and Tone frequency are adapted in common So you use the separate Update button in the upper area of the window to save these values The Update button at the bottom of the window is used only for table data Chime Bell Attribute PGM184 x Refresh close Bell Timer Tone1 480Hz NN Update gt Tone 2 620 Hz Bin Master Slave Relay 100 102 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Update Tool Bin No Master Slave Relay i Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 1 98 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 In this menu you can program the attributes of R2 DCOB These menus consist of combo boxes System Attribute PGM186 x Refresh S4uUpdate close Line Status Calling Category CLI Digit Num Metering Type ANI Request R2 OLIT Manage Timer R2 IN Manage Timer R2 Disappear Timer R2 Pulse Timer R2 Ready Timer Dial Tone Delay Timer Operation r 01 50 sec 01 50 sec 01 50 sec 01 30 msec 000 500 20msec 01 30 sec R2 Out Digit Timer E O1 50 se
74. PC Admin Connection Type From V3 0 PC Admin supports LAN and serial connections directly Because the SBX IP system uses a PPP connection PC Admin can be connected with PPP from your PC PC Admin uses a small program to manage the connection separately This connection manager is not done by itself This module transfers data between the GUI and MPB software Site Management Tool PC Admin can save simple information for sites so that you can connect to the site directly by using this list Operation 1 Tools Site Information Site Information C3 Mew e Save 53 all Delete 7 iClose Site List View Board Information Ste Site IP Address Name Phx Office 172 19 12 44 Site IP 172 19 15 2 Ib Phx office 172 19 15 2 Site ISDN Num Site MODEM Num Site Location Site Telephone Install date Last upgrade date MPB Version System Type 2 Pressthe New button to add site information A dialog box for each information piece will display in the following order Site Name IP Address Modem phone number Location Telephone number for customer Install date Last upgrade date The telephone number for customer install date and last upgrade date are information for engineering 3 After setting each field press the Save button to save changes Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Basic Information 1 7 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 4 To
75. PGM 381 1 150 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 1 152 IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 1 153 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 396 1 155 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 397 1 155 Nation Specific nm 1 156 DTIB Rx Gain Control 400 1 156 SLIB Rx Gain Control 401 1 156 ACOB Rx Gain Control 404 1 156 DCOB Rx Gain Control 406 1 156 Rx Gain Control 407 1 156 DTRU Rx Gain Control PGM 408 1 156 EXT Page Rx Gain Control PGM 409 1 156 CPTU Rx Gain Control PGM 410 1 156 MODU Rx Gain Control PGM 411 1 157 Other Gain Table 1 158 System Tone Frequency PGM 420 1 159 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 1 160 Distinct CO Ring Frequency PGM 422 1 161 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 1 162 Initialization DB Init 1 163 PnntDatabasB e in ES 1 165 Print Prot Data PGM 451 1 165 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro General Description
76. PSTN 11 PSTN 12 PSTN 13 2 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM322 Networking CO Group 0 24 Networking CO Line Type pw Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Net CO Group 00 24 00 Networking CO group programming for Networking call 2 VOIB Mode H 323 SIP This admin program establishes which protocol is used among H 323 or SIP at each VOIP CO line Gatekeeper Usage ON OFF OFF Net CO Line Type QSIG PSTN PSTN DTMF Mode 2 INBAND DTMF This Admin program determines DTMF 3 RFC2833 DTMF Mode at each VOIP CO line 4 Outband DTMF Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 132 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Networking NUM Plan Table Refresh update chose _ ARENT SAKE Table Index H 00 71 System Usage NET bd NUM Plan Code 3222 maxlength 16 NUMPlanCOGroup 00 24 CPN 125456 length 16 IP Info 1 2 ALT SPD Bin 2222 2000 4999 DEST MPB IP 0 0 0 0 Digit Repeat Code Usage Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 System Usage NET PSTN NET 2 Net Numbering Code 16 digits means any digits can be inserted between 0 9 The digits followed by is an internal station number 3 Net Number CO Grou
77. PX or PABX does not provide dial tone System provides dial tone PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Ring Back called party status exists then the system Tone provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that Ring back is provided by PX YES PX NO System PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Error Tone called party status exists then the system provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that error tone is provided by PX YES PX NO System PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Busy Tone called party status exists then the system provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that busy tone is provided by PX YES PX NO System Release 3 5 WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 47 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Line Attributes PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Announce called party status exists then the system Tone provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that announcement is provided by PX but the system provides only error tone YES PX NO System CO Flash 000 300 005 10 msec base Timer Open Loop 00 20 00 100 msec base Detect Timer Line Length SHORT SHORT Line Len
78. Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Speed Zone PGM 232 2 120 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Speed Zone PGM 232 You can sort system speed dials by up to 10 zones and use them for station COS checking and a status of each station Operation System Speed Zone Table c Refresh SUupdate Close System Speed Zone Table PGM232 Speed Bin Range Speed Bin Range ET Idx in Zone in zone Cond Toll Checking Auth Checking Station Station List station Update Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Enterthe speed bin range in zone fields 2000 2499 2 Select Toll Checking On Off When you use a station range to access a zone check station COS and determine to restrict according to the Access Deny table 3 Click the Update button Flexible DID Table PGM 232 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Speed Bin Range in 2200 2499 Each zone is exclusive Zone 2000 2199 Toll Free Zone Station Range to Station 4 100 131 Access Zone Toll Checking YES NO YES ON Auth Check YES NO YES ON Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 2 121 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Weekly Time Table PGM 233 You can set day night weekend start time for each day A total of 1
79. Plan Code 10 Net DSS Button NetDSS number When using the Networking feature checked by MPB 11 Reserved Station COS 116 You can change COS Class of Service for each station There are seven Classes of Service All lt PRefresh Yose station COS for day and night operation is COS1 by COS Assignment PGM116 default For a particular call the CO COS is combined with station COS to determine the appropriate restriction Each station must be assigned a class of service which governs the station s toll restriction for the day and night operation The weekend COS is same as the night COS wl Update Tool End z x Range Update Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Group Access Station 117 2 33 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Group Access Station PGM 117 You can divide the CO lines by group and give a station an access to a specified CO line group All stations can access any CO line as default REE SRefresh SHupdate CO Group Access PGM117 1 8 9716 1724 2532 37750 41 48 49756 7 64 657772 Tof Check Uncheck EE Internal Page Zone Access 118 Each station can be assigned to an internal paging zone Yon can assign a station to a number of zones or to no zone at all If a station is not i
80. Queued Call Count P9 0 99 C yee SYS SPD Group Number 620 Group Station 100 Q 103 Q 106 9 109 9 10149 10419 107 Q 110 Q 102 9 105 Q 108 9 11149 si 33333 33233233333332323333 Station Group Type PGM 190 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Group Type 0 7 0 0 Not assigned 4 Ring 1 Circular 5 VM 2 Terminal 6 Pick up 3 UCD 7 Net VM Pick up Attribute ON OFF OFF OFF Member Assignment Not Assigned Group Type must be assigned first Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 97 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Circular Terminal Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec system announces the greeting if one exists VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec system announces the VMIB if assigned VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce a greeting when the Location 1 assigned VMIB Announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce greeting when the Location 2 assigned VMIB Announce 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires sec 000 not assigned Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is
81. Speed Dial 552 Do Not Disturb DND 553 2 Use the following table and change the Number Set Type Release 3 5 bu VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 1 18 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Flexible Numbering Plan for SBX IP PGM104 ITEM INTERCOM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Number Set Type 1 100 131 Yes As the basic type the 1st digit of the station numbers should be 1 4 Number Set Type 2 100 131 No The number can be changed within 799 Number Set Type 3 100 131 No Australia default Number Set Type 4 700 731 No New Zealand default Number Set Type 5 200 231 No Italy default Number Set Type 6 21 53 No Max Station Ports 32 Stations above max ports will be displayed as Number Set Type 7 100 131 No Max Station Ports 32 Stations above max ports will be displayed as Number Set Type 8 100 131 No The number can be changed within 999 Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Setting PGM 108 1 19 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin IP Setting PGM 108 You must set the IP Address to transport data remotely through the network Operation 1 Select IP Setting Default values are displayed 2 Name has no meaning at all Enter a name of up to 15 characters You can put the hostname if you want But in that case it is not a real hostname optional 3 Enter the Ser
82. Start Time oo 00 Lunch Ring ITEM Day Weekly Time Table PGM 233 DEFAULT REMARK Day ring mode start time HH MM Night Night ring mode start time HH MM Weekend Weekend ring mode start time HH MM Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Voice Mail Dialing Table 234 1 134 Voice Mail Dialing Table Yoice Mail Dialing Table PGM234 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin PGM 234 Refresh Close Apply this feature to use voice al aid signal assignment DLE between two systems Index Prefix Suffix Description It is recommended that you leave 1 P Put Mail the default values 2 P Get Mail 3 Busy Table Operation 4 P 4P No Answer Table 1 Click Voice Mail Dialing 5 5 Error Table Table 6 P 6P DND Table 2 Select the Update tool 7 in the popup menu by 8 right clicking the mouse 9 Disconnect Table 3 After editing press Update button to save the change Voice Mail Table PGM 234 DIGIT ITEM DEFAULT REMARK 1 VM Table 1 Prefix P Put Mail Suffix 2 VM Table 2 Prefix P Get Mail Suffix 3 VM Table 3 Prefix Suffix 4 VM Table 4 Prefix P 0P Suffix 5 VM Table 5 Prefix No Answer Table P 4P Suffix 6 VM Table 6 Prefix Error Table P 5P Suffix 7 VM Table 7 Busy Table 8 VM Table 8 DND Table 9 VM Table 9 Disconnect Table
83. System Speed Zone PGM 232 You can divide system speed dials into 10 zones maximum and use zones for station COS checking and a status of each station Operation 1 Click System Speed Zone Q System Speed Zone PGM232 Refresh Close Index Speed Bin From Speed Bin Toll Check Auth Check 4 accessible Stn 4 Update Tool D i 2499 2200 2499 Index Accessible Speed Range 2200 2499 Toll check Auth Check C OO XO C eoc ojojojojojojojo c ojlojojojojojojo _ E Update Delete Close E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E L E 2 Enter speed bin range in zone field 2200 2499 3 Select Toll Checking On Off When you use station range to access zone check station COS and determine to restrict according to the Access Deny table 4 Click the Update button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Speed Zone PGM 232 1 132 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Update Tool Index Accessible Speed Range E o Tol check Auth Check 118 Update Delete Close System Speed Zone Editing Window Flexible DID Table PGM 232 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Speed Bin Range in Zone 2200 2499 Each zone is exclusive 2000 2199 Toll Free Zone Station Range to Access Zone Station 100 131 Toll Checking YES NO YES ON Auth Check YES NO
84. Update button to save your data Release 3 5 WX vERTICAEL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG IP Phone Programming 1 150 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin RSG I P Phone Programming VOI B Slot Assignment for RSG I P Phone PGM 380 RSG I P Phone Port Number Assignment 381 The RSG IP Phone receives call service through VOIB Then the VOIB for RSG IP can be assigned If several boards are assigned assign the first VOIB slot on STA COL Board in PGM 103 Operation 1 Click VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone Then default information will be displayed about RSG IP Phone 2 First select the VOIB slot and update using the first part If you select the non VOIB slot PC Admin will show an error message After setting the VOIB slot press the Update button in the upper menu to save the change 3 Second set the port number of each VOIB slot After changing press the Update Port button to save this configuration 4 Next configure RSG number and IP Phone number to be used After setting ports press the Update Num button to save the changes Release 3 5 XA veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG IP Phone Port Number Assignment PGM 381 1 151 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin OIB Slot for RSG IP PGM380 381 BI ES Refresh Update Close VOIB Slot For RSG IP 7 8 Select VOIB Slot Channel Number Update Channel Update N
85. VPN function 8 Net CC Retain Mode ON OFF OFF amp 8 2 NET Supplimentary Attributes im E4 Refresh update 1 1 Supplimentary Attribute PGM321 NET Transfer Mode REROUT TCP Port e000 0 9999 UDP Port 9001 0 9999 BLF Manager IP 0 0 0 0 Muliticast IP 0 0 0 0 NET TRANS Fault Recall Timer 10 1 300 sec Duration of BLF status 1 20 sec Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Networking Transfer Mode RERT JOIN REROUT Only Transfer by Rerouting is possible 2 TCP Port 0000 9999 9000 TCP port for BLF message 3 UDP Port 0000 9999 9001 UDP port for BLF message 4 Manager IP Address 12 digits 0 0 0 0 IP Address of BLF manager for BLF service 5 Duration of BLF Status 01 20 sec 02 Duration of BLF status message 6 Multicast IP Address 12 digits 0 0 0 0 IP address of Multicast for BLF service 7 Net Trans Fault Recall Timer 001 300 010 Network transfer fault recall timer 8 VOIP Call Reroute CO Group 00 24 00 Used to set the CO group of gatekeeper Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking CO Line Attribute 322 2 131 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 4 8 3 Networking CO Line Attr xi 322 lt SRefresh S4update Close CO Line List PSTN 2 PSTN PSTN as PSTN 6 PSTN 7 PSTM 3 PSTN 9 PSTN 10
86. YES ON Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 1 133 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 You can set day night weekend start time for each day A maximum of six entries are possible Weekend is after 6 o clock on Friday Operation Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 1 Click Weekly Time Table select a number 1 15 2 Select the table index in combo box If you select an index data will be read 3 After editing press the Update button to save changes Weekly Time Table PGM233 Bei Refresh Index X Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day Ring Mode Start Time os 00 Night Ring Mode Start Time 18 00 Weekend Ring Mode Start Time Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time 09 00 Night Ring Mode Start Time 18 00 Weekend Ring Mode Start Time Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time Night Ring Mode Start Time 18 00 Weekend Ring Mode Start Time NEN Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time o9 00 Night Ring Mode Start Time 18 00 Weekend Ring Mode Start Time Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time fos 00 Night Ring Mode Start Time Weekend Ring Mode Start Time 18 00 Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time 1 Night Ring Mode Start Time NEN Weekend Ring Mode Start Time oo o0 Lunch Ring Day Ring Mode Start Time Night Ring Mode Start Time Weekend Ring Mode
87. changes Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR Assignment PGM 220 1 113 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Q LCR Assignment PGM220 Refresh S4uUpdate Close ZONE 1 0 Time Zone 2 ZONE 1 0 Time Zone 3 ZONE10 LCR Access Mode MOO Disable LCR Day Zone MON Zone1 FRI zone3 SAT Zone 3 SUN Zone 3 Time Zone 1 i TUE Zone WED Zone2 THU Zone1 ZONE 2 9 ZONE 3 18 El 24 ZONE 2 9 ZONE 3 18 ZONE 2 9 ZONE 3 18 LCR Table PGM 220 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK LCR Moo Disable LCR Access Mode 00 M00 Disable LCR Access M01 M00 LCR Access Mode01 M01 only Loop LCR M02 LCR Access Mode02 M02 Internal and Loop LCR M11 LCR Access Mode11 M11 Loop and Direct CO LCR M12 LCR Access Mode12 M12 Internal Loop and Direct CO LCR M13 LCR Access Mode13 M13 Internal Loop Direct CO and Direct Loop LCR Day Zone Zone 3 Belongs to First select day and choose zone Day 1 7 Zone 1 Time Belongs to The system accepts the same value for 00 and 24 and changes 00 if 24 Zone 00 24 Zone 1 is input as the starting value and vice versa Note The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 Note 10 13 represents 10 00 00 12 59 59 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June
88. come H PC Admin PC Attendant _ CTI uer Remote Diagnostic MET REMOTE ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Off line SMDR Statistics Print 01 11 COM 1 01 01 COM1 Admin Print 01 11 COM 1 01 02 COM MODU 03 TELNET 1 Traffic 01 11 COM 1 01 04 TELNET 2 SMDI Print 01 11 COM 1 01 05 TELNET 3 Call Information 01 11 COM 1 01 06 Reserved Info On line SMDR 01 11 COM 1 01 07 NET PCADM 08 NET PCATD Trace 01 11 COM 1 01 09 NET CTI Debug 01 11 COM 1 01 10 NET REMOTE PC Admin 01 11 Auto Select Display Only 11 Not Supported PC Attendant 01 11 NET PCATD 08 CTI 01 11 NET CTI 09 Remote Diagnostic N A Not Supported Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 2 71 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 If the type of CO line is PULSE instead of DTMF it decides pulse dial ratio Pulse Dial Ratio c Refresh update Close Pulse Dial Ratio PGM176 SMDR Attributes PGM 177 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR provides details on both incoming and outgoing calls As an assignable database option if Long Distance All Call is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are all provided If only Long Distance is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed below are provided Pulse Dial Ratio Op
89. connect to a site move the mouse to the site that you want to connect and right click with the mouse button The following selection menu will display Connect LAN Connect SIO Connect MODEM Selected Site Delete Get Information from current connected site From this menu you can select the type of connection Use the Get Information from current connected site to save the basic configuration of the site If you select this menu during your connection PC Admin will read the basic slot configuration and will save the data If you save this data you can later see this information without connecting to the site File Connect This menu is for fast connection to the last site that you have visited The PC Admin software remembers the type of connection and connection number IP address or telephone number of the last site visited So if you want to connect again to the last visited site select this menu instead of selecting site information Basic nformation Connect LED If connection is established between PC Admin and the SBX IPsystem the connect light LED will illuminate The Tool Bar shows menu items including connection and disconnection to the system Reload Debug Window and Item Window Tx Rx LED This LED will illuminate when PC Admin sends or receives data from the SBX IP system Nation Code and Site Name This information will be displayed when connection is established between PC
90. er rag saa Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 External Control Contact PGM 168 2 64 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro External Control Contact PGM 168 Loud Bell Control Door Open External Device Control can be set to use an external control contact The contact feature ranges from 1 to 4 contacts A default value is not assigned 4 External Control Contact Refresh Slupdate Close External Control Contact PGM168 Flex Button Assigned Value LBC Door Open External Page 1 Not Use Not Use Not Use Inet use 1 Select one of the control contacts 2 For Loud Bell Control indicate a station to be assigned Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCD Date Time Language Display Mode 169 2 65 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro LCD Date Time Language Display Mode PGM 169 You can set a different time date language for the LCD screen Operation 1 LCD Time Mode 12 Hour Mode or 24 Hour Mode 2 LCD Date Mode MM DD YY or DD MM YY 3 LCD Language Select a language LCD Date Time Langua Mi xl Refresh Sypd ate LCD Date Time Language Display PGM169 LCD Time Display Mode 12 Hour Mode Modem PGM 170 Modem PGM 170 allows you to specify which station or CO line is connected to the modem The last Refresh 5jupdate Close station 131 i
91. group 1 36 and click the Initialize button that is located below the Initialize CO Group area 3 Select alternative DMT index 1 99 and click the Initialize button of Initialize Alternative DMT Index area 4 Click Initialize All LCR Table to initialize all LCR table LCR Table Initialization PGM223 Pudclose Initialize all DMT Index of Day Zone in LDT Day Zone Day Zone 1 ina Select DMT Index 2 3 5 M Initialize Initialize CO Group Initialize Alternative DMT Index CO Group 5 Alternative DMT Index E x Initialize Initialize Initialize All LCR Table Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Toll Exception PGM 224 1 119 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Toll Exception PGM 224 Toll tables are used to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls for the stations assigned STATION COS Exception table A amp B allow the station that is programmed in STA COS 2 3 amp 4 to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site Each allow deny table may contain up to 30 number strings All bins of allow and deny tables have no entries by default Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any number 0 9 Don t care Use the following rules when setting
92. information area V co Warning Tone Automatic Hold T 5 Save File To save information to file click Save File 6 Exit Click the Exit button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Options Window 2 11 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Options Window You can change the program environment lt Option 01 Refresh SHupdate chose Save Memory to File at Shutdown Restore Last Desktop Position at Startup Default Loading File Name at Startup v 0 WPcapp LOK New PCAdminPro Save Memory to File at Shutdown If this box is checked the File is automatically saved when the program is closed Restore Last Desktop Position at Startup If this box is checked when the program is started up the window is automatically activated to the same figure as before last closed e Default Loading File Name at Startup If this box is checked the Database file is automatically loaded to memory You must set the default file name in the text box below this option Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Desktop 2 12 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Desktop This feature allows you to save a window s position and size and be able to switch between up to 10 saved desktop windows This icon is at the top menu of the program Click this icon to popup the Desktop desktop function
93. is not in any internal zone it will not receive any page announcement The system supports 5 internal paging zones Operation 1 Click Internal Page Zone Access 2 Selectthe page zone number and click Refresh button Then the available station list will be displayed 3 The rest of the operation is the same as the CO Group Access feature Conference Page Zone PGM 119 Each station can be assigned to a conference paging zone Yon can assign a station in a number of zones or no zone at all The system supports a total of 5 conference paging zones Operation 1 Click Conference Page Zone 2 Select the conference page zone and click Refresh to see the station list that is able to access a specified conference page zone 3 The rest of the operation is the same as 118 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 1 37 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 You may assign a station to an ICM Tenancy Group and restrict ICM Tenancy Groups to call each other Each ICM Tenancy Group can be assigned a different attendant Operation 1 Click ICM Tenancy Group Then all ICM tenancy group information is displayed on one screen 2 Select an ICM Tenancy Group that you want to change and click the Update button in the popup menu ICM Tenancy Group PGM120 1 Refresh Close Group ATD Station Access Group
94. is set the station on RSG can access a CO line on his RSG by dialing the CO Line access code in the 1st available CO group ex 9 7 Ring w o CO Ring ON OFF ON If the field is set stations on Assign RSG will receive the incoming CO ring even though the CO ring is not assigned Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 1 153 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 The following is the attributes of RSG Operation 1 Click IP Phone Attribute Then all data will be read 2 Select an index that you want to edit and press Update Tool in the popup menu Then the update tool will be activated You can edit only two fields MAC Address and CTI IP Address Others are not able to be changed manually 3 After editing press the Update button to save changes IP Phone Attributes PGM386 Refresh Close jin No MAC Address IP Address Port View Port Num Address Port No STUN Enable 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mone 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mone 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mone 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Update Tool Bin No MAC Address IP Address
95. it will be shown Authorization Lo Refresh iClose Authorization Code Table PGM227 z i 3 5 Night COS Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 2 115 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Customer Call Routing PGM 228 According to voice guidance an outside caller may be connected to a certain destination and hear another voice message by pressing a keyset button Operation Select a CCR table number 01 70 and press the Refresh button You will see 10 entry indexes in the CCR Table Station Station Number Hunt Group Hunt Group Number IBC1 70 System Speed Drop 1 70 System Speed 2000 4999 Internal Page 1 30 External Page 1 3 All Call Page 1 3 NET 055 CONF ROOM 1 9 Bue Mis Bree ZE n po o m a_i R ML a_i T Cs Release 3 5 W veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Customer Call Routing 228 2 116 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Customer Call Routing Table PGM 228 TYPE DIGIT TYPE RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station Station 2 Hunt Group Hunt 3 VMIB Announce 4 VMIB DROP Announce 5 System Speed 2000 2499 6 Internal Page 1 5 7 External Page 1 8 All Cal
96. pilot number will hunt Alt if no Member ON OFF OFF If there is no member on duty an ICM call will be dropped or an incoming CO call will be routed to the Attendant Release 3 5 WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 105 ITEM Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Circular Terminal Group Attributes PGM 191 RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Music Source 0 9 0 not assigned If music source is assigned calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone Alternate Destination Sta No Hunt No When a call comes into the group and there is no available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned Max Queue Call Count 00 99 99 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON members will be forwarded Queue Count Display ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a Hunt member can check the Queue Count UCD Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received sec f
97. queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Supervisor Sta Supervisor station number Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON members will be forwarded Queue Count Display ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a Hunt member can check the Queue Count Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 109 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Voice Mail Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Put Mail Index 1 4 1 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables Get Mail Index 1 4 2 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables Hunt Type CIRC TERM 1 Circular Hunt Group TERM 0 Terminal Hunt Group SMDI Port B Not to be programmed Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Overflow Destination Sta B The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Pick Up Group Attributes 191
98. record the conversation of Record both parties Fax Mode ON OFF OFF In Fax mode Single ring and No Attendant Recall Off net Call EXT ALL ALL ALL Internal Off net Call Fwd and External Off net Call Fwd are Mode allowed EXT only External Off net Call Fwd is allowed UCD Grp ON OFF OFF When DID DISA call destination is STA Service ON ring to UCD Grp to which the station belongs OFF ring to the station Ring Grp ON OFF OFF When DID DISA call destination is STA Service ON ring to Ring Grp to which the station belongs OFF ring to the station StopCampOn ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE prevents the Camp on Tone from sounding Tone DISABLE Line Length SHORT SHORT Line Length LONG FAR MSG SCRL 0 7 3 Scroll speed when a broadcasting message is displayed SPD Block Back ON OFF OFF To prevent unattended recalling the 1st CO line will be disconnected Call if an SLT seizes a 2nd CO line with FLASH I Time RST ON OFF OFF Internal RST Stn Auth Chk ON OFF OFF Station authentication check Reserved ON OFF OFF Door Open EN DIS EN Door open enable Dummy Stn ON OFF OFF Dummy Station Usage Emergency ON OFF OFF Supervisor Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 28 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Attributes PGM113 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ADMIN ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to program the Admin Database This DISABLE feature is available at only DKTUs
99. routing of DID type 2 is executed 01 10 05 Establishes the time allowed for a FAX tone to be 2 digits sec detected before disconnection 1 5 1 Establishes the time allowed for a FAX call before 1 digit min disconnection Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 In Room Indication PGM 183 2 82 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro In Room I ndication PGM 183 Operation In Room Indication xc Refresh update Close In Room Indication PGM183 Idx Supervisor Member Station List t Ca 102 Station Update 3 103 1 Enter a supervisor station 2 Click the Station List button then drag and drop member station in the station list 3 Click the Update button to change all values or Station Update for member station In Room Indication PGM 183 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Supervisor Station Member Station Max 20 Stations Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Chime Bell Attributes PGM 184 2 83 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Chime Bell Attributes PGM 184 Operation Chime Bell Attributes PGM 184 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station Pair Station Relay 1 14 0 Bell Timer 1 20 Bell Frequency Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 2 84 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro DCOB System Attributes
100. station Pre selected ON OFF OFF MSG DND Park and Page ON OFF OFF Call Coverage ON OFF OFF DND to VM ON OFF ON Back Light ON OFF OFF ISDN Station Attributes PGM114 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CLIP LCD ON OFF ON This field is determined whether a station displays CLIP Display COLP LCD ON OFF OFF This field is determined whether a station displays COLP Display CLI Redirect 0 1 0 To Select Original CLI or Redirected CLI Display 0 Original CLI 1 Redirected CLI CLI MSG Wait ON OFF OFF An ON setting allows a station to receive CO message wait indications Ext or CO ATD ATD EXT EXT To Select EXT extension number or CO ATD to make outgoing CLI or COLP information Keypad KEYPAD DTMF This field determines whether an ISDN station sends digit in DTMF or Facility DTMF keypad facility after connected LONG LONG SHORT This field determines whether an ISDN station acts in Short passive SHORT SHORT mode or in the Long mode CPN Type 0 2 0 This field indicates how the CPN IE is filled in SETUP message 0 Do not sent CPN Called Party Number to SO In this case all SO STA of the S port will be ringing 1 Send station number as CPN 2 Bypass the CPN from the network In options 1 amp 2 only one specific STA will be ringing Release 3 5 W vertical SBX PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 29 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ISDN Station Attributes PGM114
101. station transfers to a busy station and hangs up this 3 digits sec recall timer is invoked Exclusive Hold Recall 000 300 060 Establishes the amount of time before a call placed on Timer 3 digits sec exclusive hold will recall the station placing the hold I Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time before a call recalls the 3 digits sec attendant System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time before a call placed on 3 digits sec system hold will recall the station placing the hold Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time a transferred call will ring 3 digits sec at the station receiving the transfer and how long it will recall the station transferring the call ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 030 When the ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no 3 digits sec available CO Line in the group this timer is invoked When the ACNR Delay Timer expires invoke the ACNR Pause Timer if there is still no available CO line ACNR is activated ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 030 This Timer is invoked after system detects CO ring back 2 digits sec tone or voice from a CO party After this timer the system retries ACNR ACNR Pause Timer 005 300 030 When this timer expires ACNR is activated 3 digits sec For CIS 5 300 ACNR Retry Counter 01 30 03 This counter decreases every time the station retries ACNR ACNR is canceled if set to 0 For CIS 1 9 ACNR Retry No Tone 1 9 1
102. timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires Timer sec 000 not assigned Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 108 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Ring Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Music Source 0 9 0 not If music source is assigned calling user will be heard assigned music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone Max Queue Call Count 00 99 99 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total
103. type NO cascading Imediately NO cascading When noti fails Urgent E mail Notification Off On Off Voicemail password max 11 digits none SMTP Server IP XXX XXX XXX XXX none E mail address max 50 characters none SMTP user ID max 24 characters none SMTP password max 24 characters none First Name max 12 characters none Last Name max 12 characters none Release 3 5 XA verTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Display Station with COS PGM 130 1 49 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Display Station with COS PGM 130 This feature is linked to Station COS PGM 116 Refer to PGM 116 Station COS Display CO Group Access Station PGM 131 This feature is linked Station COS PGM117 Refer to PGM 117 CO Group Access Display Hot Desk Attribute PGM 250 Operation Station Base Program Hot Desk Attribute You can change only two items on the screen One is the Hot Desk Agent Number and the other is the AutoLogout Timer View Agent Range will only display the assigned range by first item The assigned range will start from the last station Hot Desk Attribute PGM250 IOl xl c Refresh update Close Hot Desk Agent 000 End Station o View Agent Range N A AutoLogoutTimer 01 24 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Line Base Program 1 50 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Base Program Use this CO Line Base Progra
104. up the Allow Deny Tables e Ifthe tables have no entries no restriction is applied If entries are made in the allow table and only there then only those numbers are allowed If entries are made in the deny table and only there then only those numbers are denied If there are entries in both tables the allow table is searched first and if number is found it is allowed If not found the deny table is searched and if number is found it is denied If it is not found in either table it is allowed Allow Deny Rules PGM 224 ENTRY CONDITIONS amp RESULT ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE Not Exist Not Exist No Restriction No Restriction Exist Not Exist Found allowed Not found denied Not Exist Exist Found denied Not found allowed Exist Exist Found allowed Found denied Not found check deny Not found allowed table Release 3 5 WX vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Toll Exception PGM 224 1 120 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Operation Click Toll Exception Table Select table allow or deny rn iclose Allow Allow B Allow C Allow D Deny Deny B Deny C Deny D _1 _ 14Diaits D is don t care 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Update Tool Index Value Max 14Digits D is don t 5 5 5 jJ Update Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June
105. 00 9999 Tt T2 Nation Specific Ring 4 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 2 144 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 User entered frequency may be changed to the closest system frequency provided Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Tone Frequence lel xi xc Refresh update Close ACNR Tone Frequence PGM423 Ring Back Tone T1 ON po 0 255 Ring Back Tone T2 OFF ioo 0 255 Busy Tone T1 ON 25 0 255 Busy Tone 2 OFF 25 0 255 Error Tone 1 Error Tone 2 OFF S Dial Tone T1 ON 0 255 S Dial Tone T2 OFF 0 255 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring Back Tone 000 255 ON 100 OFF 200 20ms base Busy Tone 000 255 ON 025 OFF 025 20ms base Error Tone 000 255 ON 012 OFF 012 20ms base S Dial Tone 000 255 150 OFF 000 20 base Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Chapter 3 Speed Editor I ntroduction The Speed Editor is an MS Windows application program that can download edit and upload speed data of the SBX IP system This program can send and receive the speed information such as speed bin number speed bin name phone number CO line type Net Number and CO number Network index number Hardware Software Requirements SBX IP System SBX IP system MPB Software Ver 3 7Aa o
106. 000 Editing Area Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 File Menu 3 3 Chapter 3 Speed Editor File Menu The File menu includes New Open File Save File Recommendation When speed editor accesses network drives opening and saving files can fail due to the network condition Therefore it is recommended that you copy files onto local drives LDK Spd Editor Eile Connection File Transfer Help New 4 4 Open File Ci Save File Exit New Sub menu Select New sub menu in File menu gt the System Selection dialog displays Select the system and version Enter the range you want to edit Click the OK button P op qo System Selection Range From 2499 cance Open File sub menu 1 Select Open File sub menu in File menu gt Open Dialog displays 2 Select the file type text doc or Excel 3 Click the OK button Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Connection Menu 3 4 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Save File sub menu 1 Select Save File sub menu in File menu gt Save Dialog displays 2 Select the file type text doc or Excel 3 Click the OK button Connection Menu This program can be connected to the SBX IP system through the LAN LDK Spd Editor File Connection File Transfer Help Connect sub menu 1 Select Connect sub menu in Connection men
107. 06 2 138 VMIB Rx Gain Control PGM 407 2 138 DTRU Rx Gain Control PGM 408 2 138 EXT Page Rx Gain Control PGM 409 2 138 CPTU Rx Gain Control 410 2 138 MODU Rx Gain Control 411 2 138 Other Gain Table 412 418 424 2 140 System Tone Frequency 420 2 141 Differential Ring Frequency 421 2 142 Distinct CO Ring Frequency 422 2 143 Tone Cadence PGM 423 2 144 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Introduction 2 1 Hardware Software Requirements 2 1 Hardware Configuration 2 1 Installing amp Unstalling Software 2 2 Full Screen Layout 2 2 File Menu 2 3 Connection Menu 2 4 File Transfer Menu 2 6 Editing Data 2 8 Release 3 5 VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 9 Editing in Speed Editor View 2 8 Editing Text or Doc File 2 9 Editing Excel File
108. 1 SUBNET Mask 55 255 255 0 GK Open H245 GK Find Port 0 9999 DNS Address 0 0 0 0 GK H245 Tunneling GK RAS Signal Port 1719 0 9999 GK Pregranted Arq GK Signal Port 1720 0 9999 GK Out of Band Flash GK Time to live sec 0 250 YOIBH3231D 23chs vombEi64Addr 23dy VOIB Terminal Alias Default Codec G 723 1 Default Gain 31 1 62 No Delay TOS Throughput TOS Reliabilty TOS Trace Password Firewall IP Address VOIB Mode DSP Use Silence Detection DTMF Mode Inband DTMF Early H 245 DSP Use Echo Canceler H 323Mode FAST ha r Jitter Buffer 50 00 H245Tunneling Voice Monitor TOS Precedence b 0 7 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 1 147 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Operation 1 Note Select the VOIB board number If the selected board number is not the VOIB PC Admin will display an error message This program is valid only for VOIB After the selecting board number press the Refresh button Then PC Admin will receive the information about the selected VOIB Upon initial entry all data are default values Ask your network administrator for correct values To save the data press the Update button SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 are also opened from this window There is no PGM code for SIP Attributes So you cannot program SIP Attributes with a keyset S
109. 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Attendant Assignment and VMI B Announcement Number PGM 164 165 A maximum of 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendants and System Attendant The System Attendant is different than Main Attendants in aspect of call handling and system management priority The System Attendant has more priority than a Main Attendant One System Attendant and four Main Attendants can be assigned By default the System Attendant is assigned Station 100 and others are not assigned Operation 1 Click Attendant Assignment Attendant Assignment PGM164 1 Refresh dupdate Close System Attendant Station Number Attendant Add Remove Auto Attendant Auto ATD Usage VMIB ANNC o 00 70 2 Assign a System Attendant Net Number is not available 3 Assign a Main Attendant Network connected extension available Delete edit box to delete an assigned main attendant f you enter an invalid net number the MPB will check validation of entered net number when you press the Update button Release 3 5 verTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO to CO COS PGM 166 1 73 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO to CO COS PGM 166 When a user of a DID DISA TIE line accesses another CO line CO to CO COS is applied The attributes of CO to CO COS are the same as the station COS Operation 1 Click CO to CO COS CO to CO COS PGMIBB
110. 1 123 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Authorization Code Table PGM 227 Trunk groups can be marked to deny access until a matched Authorization code is entered In this case a DND warning tone is provided when the trunk group access code is dialed If the dialed Authorization code is verified you will receive CO dial tone Otherwise you will receive an error tone and you cannot access the group Stations or admin programming can enter the authorization codes An Authorization code is fixed at 5 digits The Administrator can see and change a station s password There can be no duplicate entries By default Authorization Codes are not assigned Operation 1 Click Authorization Code Table If an authorization code is already registered it will be shown 2 After editing press the Update button to save changes You can save and reload these codes as a file If you want to save or reload database file click the update menu and select a menu e Auth Code Data Save Save the data as a file e Auth Code Data Load Load the data as a file e Auth Code Data Save Write loaded data to the MPB from start to end automatically At this time you do not need to do anything PC Admin will operate the process automatically until an empty bin is found The file that is used by this feature cannot be opened or edited by other software This file is specific to PC Admin Auth code range was from 3 digits to 11 digits and COS will be di
111. 1 150 020 The CO Release Guard Timer controls the time 3 digits 100ms necessary to guarantee idle loop state when the line is released CO Ring Off Timer 001 150 060 This timer is to secure time interval between incoming 3 digits 100ms ringing signals so that the active ringing can be continued in the system until this timer expires CO Ring On Timer 1 9 2 The CO Ring On Timer controls the time necessary to 1 digit 100ms detect an outside line as ringing into the system CO Warning Tone Timer 060 900 180 Establishes the amount of time before receiving warning 3 digits sec tone to remind of the call elapsed time in case of outgoing CO conversations VM Outbound Retry 0 9 2 Counter 1 digit Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 1 93 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers Il PGM 181 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Call Forward No Answer 000 255 015 The Call forward busy no answer feature will take place Timer 3 digits sec using this timer If this timer has a non zero value and an extension is set to busy no answer forward by the station user then the extension will ring for this timer and will then forward to the next destination DID DISA No Answer 00 99 25 A DID call will be forwarded to the Attendant if the station Timer 2 digits sec is busy or does not answer within this time VMIB U
112. 1 63 32 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 1 100 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 This feature is for R2 DCOB programming Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin DCOB CO Line Attribute PGM187 Refresh Close Start CO Num End CO Num CO Number IN Digit Type IN Digit Type OUT Digit Type No of Digits DCOB CO Type Send 5 Block Cmd 4 R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF R2MFC R2MFC 10 2 Korea OFF Update Tool No of Digits DUT Digit Type DCOB CO Type DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM 187 1 15 Send S Block x Update Close RANGE DEFAULT REMARK IN Digit Type 0 2 2 Default R2MFC 2 To set type 0 PULSE 1 2 R2MFC OUT Digit Type 0 2 2 Default R2MFC 2 To set type 0 PULSE 1 DTMF 2 R2MFC Number of CLI Digits 01 15 10 0 2 2 0 Cyprus 1 Italy 2 Korea Send S Block Cmd ON OFF OFF Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group 1 101 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Group You can g
113. 12 M12 Internal Loop and Direct M13 CO LCR LCR Access Mode13 M13 Internal Loop Direct CO and Direct Loop LCR Day Zone Zone 3 Belongs to First select day and choose zone Day 1 7 Zone 1 Time Zone Time Belongs to The system accepts the same value for 00 and 24 and 00 24 Zone 1 changes to 00 if 24 is input as the starting value and vice versa Note The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 Note 10 13 represents 10 00 00 12 59 59 Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 2 107 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 PGM 221 is for Leading Digit Table Operation Leading Digit Table lt SRefresh Close Leading Digit Table PGM221 Compared Digits Index LCR Type 12 Digits DMT 1 DMT 2 DMT 3 Check Include D1 02 D3 01 13 D3 D2 D3 Password o 20TH 22 2 22 1 i 1 25 2 Index 0 Update LCR DMT1 D1 D2 D3 Compared Digits DMT2 D1 E 02 2 03 E Check Password OFF DMT3 Di 02 D3 Select a LCR type INT COL BOTH Enter Leading Digits it s a 12 digit no to compare with a no a user dialed previously Set up Day Zone in DMT index Leading Digit Table PGM 221 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK LCR Type 1 INT BOTH INT look up this entry only for internal dialing 2 COL
114. 125 Voice Mailbox COS 238 2 125 VolB Programing 2 126 VoIB Programming 340 Gate Keeper Attributes 341 2 126 SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 2 127 Networking Programming 2 129 Networking Attributes PGM 320 PGM321 2 129 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 2 131 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 132 RSG IP Phone Programming 2 133 VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone 380 2 133 Release 3 5 WV venTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Contents TOC 8 RSG IP Phone Port Number Assignment 381 2 133 RSG IP Phone Attribute 382 2 134 IP Phone Attribute 386 2 135 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 390 392 394 396 2 137 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 391 393 395 397 2 137 Nation Specific 2 138 DTIB Rx Gain Control PGM 400 2 138 SLIB Rx Gain Control PGM 401 2 138 SLIB12 Rx Gain Control PGM 402 2 138 WTIB Rx Gain Control PGM 403 2 138 ACOB Rx Gain Control PGM 404 2 138 8 Rx Gain Control PGM 405 2 138 DCOB Rx Gain Control PGM 4
115. 2 INBAND This Admin program determines DTMF DTMF Mode at each VOIP CO line 3 RFC2833 DTMF 4 Outband DTMF Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 324 1 143 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Networking Basic Attribute PGM 324 Operation 1 Click Networking Numbering Plan Table 2 Click Update Tool to change attributes in popup menu After changing each field press Update button to save changes Validation will be done automatically Network Numbering Plan Table PGM324 Refresh Close Index System Us NUM Plan t CPNJIP Info ALT SPD MPBIP Digit Repeat CO Cod Net Fire CO to 1 SMDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Update Tool Index 23 ISDN NET CO Group CPN VOIB NET CO Group IP Info System Usage MET m NET CO Group 00 24 Plan Code length 16 ALT SPD Bin 1 CPN length 16 DEST MPB 0 0 0 0 1 IP Info 1 0 0 0 0 d 0 0 0 0 Digit Repeat OFF 3 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 CO ATD Code CLI OFF Net Firewall Route NO CO to CO Auth Code COS Usage NO SMDR Dial Hidden NO M Relea
116. 2010 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 1 114 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 PGM 221 is the Leading Digit Table Operation 1 Click the LCR LDT Table Select an LDT number 0 249 2 Click the Update tool of the menu that is opened by right clicking with the mouse LCR LDT Table PGM221 f x1 Refresh Close Compared Digits Index LCR Type 12 Digits Day Zone 1 Day Zone 2 Day Zone 3 Check Include T1 2 3 T2 3 T2 T3 Password 0 2 4 6 13 24 19 25 43 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Update Tool Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone Index Compared Digits Day Zone 1 o 4 2 2 2 5 13 24 BOTH Check Password Day Zone 3 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table 221 1 115 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Select an LCR type INT COL BOTH Enter Leading Digits 12 digits to compare with a number a user dialed previously Set up DMT Index with the combo box You should setup the 1 field Others fields may be left blank Leading Digit Table PGM 221 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK LCR Type 1 INT BOTH INT look up this entry only for internal dialing 2 COL COL look up this entry only after dialing CO Access Code 3 BOTH BOTH look up this entry for both INT and
117. 32 Use SIP UID PGM351 1 Redial DTMF ON OFF ON Station Attributes II PGM112 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Warning ON OFF ON The allowance to receive warning tone to remind of the call elapse Tone time in case of outgoing CO conversation Automatic ON OFF ON While on a CO line the station user seizes another CO line by Hold depressing the CO button The first CO line goes on Hold automatically STA2 ON CO Call Time ON OFF OFF If this flag is set to YES a station s outgoing CO call may be Restriction disconnected when the CO call restriction timer PGM180 Btn 17 expires COLine ENABLE ENABLE The allowance to access individual CO line by dialing Access DISABLE CO Line ENABLE ENABLE The allowance of queuing for a busy CO group of lines Queuing DISABLE CO PGM ENABLE DISABLE Determines if a station user can program CO button DISABLE PLA ENABLE ENABLE Theallowance to answer calls by simply lifting handset or pressing the DISABLE SPEAKER button with the answering priority Prepaid Call ON OFF OFF The allowance to use the Prepaid CO Call feature refer to PGM180 Btn16 Release 3 5 W vERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 27 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Attributes PGM112 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Speed Dial ENABLE ENABLE Allows access to system speed dial by the station Access DISABLE Two Way ON OFF OFF During incoming or outgoing call user can
118. 5 entries are possible Weekend is after 6 o clock on Friday Operation Click Weekly Time Table then select a number 1 15 Weekly Time Table xc Refresh update Close Weekly Time Table PGM233 Table Index h Day Ring mode Start time 0900 Day Ring mode Start time Night Ring mode Start time 1800 Friday Night Ring mode Start time Weekend Ring mode Start time 1800 Day Ring mode Start time Saturday Night Ring mode Start time Weekend Ring mode Start time Weekend Ring mode Start time Day Ring mode Start time Tuesday Night Ring mode Start time Ex Ex fo m Weekend Ring mode Start time Day Ring mode Start time Day Ring mode Start time Sunday Night Ring mode Start time Weekend Ring mode Start time ono Wednesday Night Ring mode Start time Weekend Ring mode Start time Day Ring mode Start time Comment Must be 4 Digits 0000 2359 Thursday Night Ring mode Start time MEE Weekend Ring mode Start time Weekly Time Table PGM 233 ITEM DEFAULT REMARK Day Day ring mode start time HH MM Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 2 122 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Weekly Time Table PGM 233 ITEM DEFAULT REMARK Night Night ring mode start time HH MM Weekend Weekend ring mode start
119. 8 the digit is converted as 834 R2 Collect 0 Disable Disable If this feature is set to ON 1 2 R2 collect Call 1 Double call is served Answer 2 With Indicator Collect Call 001 250 010 This feature is used when R2 call is Answer Timer answered Brazil only Collect Call 001 250 010 This feature is used when R2 call is Idle Timer answered Brazil only Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 50 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 Each station can be assigned to receive a CO ring for only a certain period of time such as day night weekend and On demand 100 0 Q ame Fs Fo Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 51 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation 1 Select the popup menu you want among the modes of Day Night Weekend and On demand 2 Update CO Ring assignment by using Station Assign in the popup menu 101 0 Q 3 You can see the setting window and assign the station range and delay Release 3 5 W 1 SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO CID Attributes PGM 147 2 52 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO CID Attributes PGM 147 User can assign some attributes related with CID setting Operation 1 Click CO CIDU Attribute 2 Enterthe CO range for which you want to program CID attributes Then cur
120. 99 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Night Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 1 130 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Flexible DID Table PGM 231 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Weekend Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Reroute Destination STA Sta Hunt Or VMIB NULL 00 70 00 NOT ASG VMIB drop 00 70 00 NOT ASG SPD 2000 2499 Int Page 1 5 Ext Page 1 All Page 1 Net Number Programmed valid Net number Conf Room 1 9 STA VM Sta Note When you use this feature you will see the two results windows The first one is the result of Day Night and Weekend destinations The second result window displays the result of Reroute Destination and DID Name programming You will check the reason of an error with the result message box Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Speed Zone PGM 232 1 131 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin
121. A UK Billing ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON UK Billing Mode Mode is applied UK only COS 7 When ON OFF ON If authorization is failed with PGM 227 Auth Fail COS will be COS 7 or not with this setting Auto Fax 01 36 If Auto FAX CO line is programmed the Transfer CO system answers and detects the FAX calling tone 1100Hz 0 5sec ON 3sec OFF repeat tone from an incoming analog CO line The system will route this call to the last SLT port on BKSU when tone is detected within programmed time Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 2 b9 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Attributes Il PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 5 Dgt Auth ON OFF OFF Code Usage LCR Dial Tone ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the SBX IP Detect system first checks if the CO provides dial tone in case an analog CO line is seized for LCR dialing If there is no dial tone the call is rerouted to the Alternate DMT index If the LCR type is set to M13 the LCR dial tone detect option is not applied System Attributes PGM163 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Alarm Enable ON OFF OFF Alarm Contact CLOSE OPEN CLOSE Type Alarm Mode ALARM ALARM BELL Alarm Signal RPT ONCE RPT Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Admin Password PGM 162 2 60 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Admin Password PGM 162 A
122. Admin 2 Right click for other programming 3 Select the menu that you want to change Then a different window for the menu that you selected will display For example the following window displays Station Attribute PGM111 All Apply can be used when you want to update all Name Data Save can be used when you want to save Station Name Name Data Load can be used when you want to load from a saved file The file should be created by using the Name Data Save feature Station Attribute I PGM111 iol Refresh update Close Station Number STA Attr II STA Attr III STA Attr IV Station Auto Speaker Call Forward Data Line Security 4 ON i ON ON ON ON You can see all attributes by pressing STA Attr III IV tab buttons and scrolling to the right 4 Right click and click on the View Option The Show Item Select window will display as shown in the following illustration If you want to see specific features click the desired check boxes in this window then click OK PC Admin will display the attributes that you have selected Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 22 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Q Station Attribute I PGM111 Show Item Select 1501 Refresh update close Select All Station Number STA Station Auto Speaker Call Forward EIDEM ON
123. Admin and the SBX IP system Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Level Management Administrator Only 1 8 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Level Management Administrator Only Description and how to program PC Admin supports multi level of users Administrator has highest priority and can assign levels to each user 1 Click on Tools Level Management The following window for level management displays Level Management Save Al Clear Level s hd Delete Disable Menu Location Information PGM100 Numbering Plan PGM104 109 CO Ring Assignment PGM144 145 External Control Contact PGM168 PLA Priority PGM173 Print Serial Port Selection PGM175 close Total Menu List Pre Programed Location Information PGM100 Configuration PGM101 103 e Numbering Plan PGM104 109 IP Setting PGM108 e Station Base Program 51 6 Line Base Program CO Line List PGM140 141 142 143 3 CO Ring Assignment PGM144 145 CO Line Attribute III PGM146 e 15 CO Line Attributes PGM149 E e System Base Program e System Attributes PGM160 161 163 CD ADMIN Password PGM162 e Attendant Assignment PGM164 165 CO to CO COS PGM166 DID DISA Destination PGM167 3 External Control Contact PGM168 e LCD Date Time Language Display PGM169 Modem PGM170 Music PGM171 PBX Access Code PGM172 PLA Priority PGM173 5 232 Port Setting
124. Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 29 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Attributes PGM113 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Auto Forward ON OFF ON to VMIB Station Port ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station is blocked and it is impossible to Block use that station ISDN Station Attributes PGM114 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CLIP LCD ON OFF ON This field is determined whether a station displays CLIP Display COLP LCD ON OFF OFF This field is determined whether a station displays COLP Display CLI Redirect 0 1 0 To Select Original CLI or Redirected CLI Display 0 Original CLI 1 Redirected CLI CLI MSG Wait ON OFF OFF An ON setting allows a station to receive CO message wait indications CO ATD EXT EXT To Select EXT extension number or CO ATD to make outgoing CLI or COLP information Keypad KEYPAD DTMF This field determines whether an ISDN station sends digit in DTMF or Facility DTMF keypad facility after connected LONG LONG SHORT This field determines whether an ISDN station acts in Short passive SHORT SHORT mode or in the Long mode CPN Type 0 2 0 This field indicates how the CPN IE is filled in SETUP message 0 Do not sent CPN Called Party Number to SO In this case all SO STA of the S port will be ringing 1 Send station number as CPN 2 Bypass the CPN from the network In options 1 amp 2 only one specific STA will be ringing Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX
125. C Type Cable to connect the PC and the SBX IP system Two connectors are needed for this connection One connector must be a 9 pin female connector that is to be connected to the SBX IP and the other one must fit the serial port of the PC There are three required lines that must be connected for the communication between the PC and the SBX IP system Ground Ground Transmit Transmit and Receive Receive RS 232C Type Cable for connecting PC and the system to be routed There are three required lines that must be connected between the PC and the system to be routed Ground Ground Transmit Receive and Receive Transmit UTP cable is used for the LAN connection Environments for LAN connection The SBX IP system should have one IP address and it has to be set for the MPB using PGM108 Flex button 2 If your site uses the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation PAT Port Address Translation for security you need help from the network administrator to use the PC Admin software for remote access If you don t remember the above information you will not be able to connect to the SBX IP system from outside using PC Admin via Internet Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installation of the Online PC Admin Software 1 3 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Installation of the Online PC Admin Software 1 Putthe CD ROM into your PC 2 Run Explorer on your PC and search for the setup exe on the CD ROM 3
126. CLI with PGM114 BTN12 max 4 Long Station Max 12 Logical If outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT this field used when CLI Digits STANo making outgoing CLI MSN Wait ON OFF OFF New virtual MSN call waiting enable Long CLI 1 Max 16 Long Digits CLI 1 Long CLI 2 Max 16 Long Digits CLI 2 CC Blocking ON OFF ON Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 2 31 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 This feature is to enable programming flexible buttons and the copy feature PGM 125 Button Assignment Refresh SYupdate iClose Current Station Number Copy To 055 PGMI25 CO Line CO Line CO Line CO Line CO Line CO Line CO Line LOOP Empty Empty Empty Empty Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Flex Button Assignment PGM115 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m Information for Flex Button Assignment NO TYPE RANGE REMARK 1 User Button User can program by button programming procedure 2 CO xx Button 01 12 CO Line 3 CO Grp xx 01 24 CO Group 4 LOOP Loop Button 5 STA xxxx 100 131 Station Number 6 STA PGM Button 11 99 7 STA SPD xx 00 99 Station Speed Bin Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station COS 116 2 32 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Information for Flex Button Assignment NO TYPE RANGE REMARK 8 SYS SPD xxxx 2000 2499 System Speed Bin 9 Num Plan Button Num
127. COL look up this entry only after dialing CO Access Code 3 BOTH BOTH look up this entry for both INT and COL Release 3 5 verticac SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR DMT Table 222 2 108 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Leading Digit Table PGM 221 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CD 12 digits None To be compared with the dialed digits by a user DMT Index Each value 00 99 None Day Zone 1 2 3 has 3 time zone DMT indexes 6 digits LCR DMT Table PGM 222 PGM 222 is the Digit Modification Table Operation Digit Modification Table SSRefresh SJupdate Close Digit Modification Table PGM222 Add Digits Max 25 Digits Removal Num of digits Add CO Alternative Include D P F Position to be removed Position Group DMT Index Bone Soa 1 12 0 12 1 13 1 72 0 99 Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 cOcococcccocoocooccooz3oi Added Digit Stream 25 Digits maximum Removal Position Select a position to remove 1 12 Number of digits to be removed Select the number to be deleted 1 12 Add Position Select a position to be added 1 13 CO Group Select a CO Group 1 24 arwon gt Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 2 109 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 6 Alternative DMT index If there is no CO group to select select alternative DMT index to be used
128. Double click on the setup exe file This will bring up the initial screen for the installation of PC Admin as shown in the following illustration LDK PCADMIN 4 Click Next to start the install process If you press the Cancel button the install process will stop The next step is selecting a location for the installation InstallShield Wizard Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installation of the Online PC Admin Software 1 4 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 5 You can change the install directory if desired or click Next to install the directory to the default directory as shown in the illustration above InstallShield Wizard EDK PCADMIN 6 Enter a User Name Company Name and choose who the application will be installed for Then click Next to copy the files into the install directory that you have selected in the previous step InstallShield Wizard installShicid Wizard Complete d 7 Click the Finish button Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Brief Outline of PC Admin 1 5 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Brief Outline of PC Admin This program has a simple menu such as connection and disconnection to the system Reload and Debugging Window All of the admin program is structured in a tree shape It has 14 upper items excluding Networking and VoIP Each of them has lower items A related program appears at the
129. Forward Assignments in station attributes More than one station can be forwarded to the same destination Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers III PGM 180 181 182 1 94 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers Il PGM 181 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SLT DTMF Release Timer 00 20 00 2 digits sec 3 Soft Auto Release Timer 01 30 05 2 digits sec VM Pause Timer 01 90 30 2 digits 100ms Transit Connect Timer 01 30 04 2 digits sec VMIB MSG Rewind Timer 01 99 05 2 digits sec LCO Connect Timer 00 20 00 2 digits sec LCO CPT Detect Timer 00 20 05 2 digits sec Forward to VMIB Timer 20 60 20 If the Auto FWD to VMIB feature PGM 113 FLEX 14 is 2 digits sec set to a station the call is automatically forwarded to VMIB after this timer expires so the caller can leave a voice message Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 1 95 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers Ill PGM 182 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SLT Hook Switch Bounce 01 25 01 This timer establishes the length of time that is needed to Timer 2 digits 100ms regard as a valid on hook or off hook for SLT SLT Maximum Hook 001 250 050 This timer establishes how long the user could depress Flash Timer 2 digits 10ms t
130. Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 69 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Attributes Il PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Clear ACD ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD database initializes Database after print out after Print VMIB Prompt 00 31 08 To control prompt gain level Gain VM with CLI ON OFF OFF If the setting is ON CLI is added when Info Voice Mail information is printed through RS232 port by SMDI ACD Print 1 HOUR SEC Determines the unit of ACD Print timer of Timer Unit 0 SEC Flex Btn 10 1 hour or 10 seconds Set VM SMDI TYPE Il TYPE Set VM SMDI type Type TYPE Incoming Toll ON OFF OFF Enable or disable the toll check for Check incoming calls No DSS ENABLE DISABLE Enable or disable the LED of the CO Indication DISABLE button while ringing for incoming transfer and recalling It is not applied for direct ringing such as DID DISA UK Billing ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON UK Billing Mode Mode is applied UK only COS 7 When ON OFF OFF If authorization is failed with PGM227 Auth Fail COS will be COS 7 or not with this setting Auto Fax None 1 36 None If Auto FAX CO line is programmed the Transfer CO system answers and detects the FAX calling tone 1100Hz 0 5sec ON 3sec OFF repeattone from an incoming analog CO line The system will route this call to the last SLT port on BKSU when tone is detected within programmed ti
131. I P Attributes 1 amp 2 You can program SIP Attributes These features are not included as a keyset Admin item So if you want to change SIP Attributes you should use the latest version of PC Admin software Operation 1 2 3 Enter the PGM 340 341 area of programming Click on the SIP Attr 1 button Either enter appropriate entries in the following fields or leave them empty Proxy Server Address can be assigned text data or an IP address Maximum length of this field is 32 characters You should enter the proxy server address if you are using a proxy server in your SIP application Proxy port can be assigned from 0 9999 Registration timer is available from 0 65535 A primary and secondary DNS address can be entered the same as the proxy server address You can enter IP address or text up to 32 characters Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 51 Attributes 1 amp 2 1 148 SIP Attribute 1 cBefresh Update Close VOIB Setting SIP Attr 2 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ile E Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port Proxy Registration Timer Use Outbound Proxy Primary DNS Address Secondary DNS Address Domain Connection Mode UDP Use Rport Method Remote Party ID IP Centrex Asserted ID Usage Use Ext Mo 0 0 0 e Ld 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 cielo loli 100Rel Support Use Default Codec Only 181 Message SIP Name Service Use Privacy
132. IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 30 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro ISDN Station Attributes PGM114 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Sub Address 0 2 0 This field indicates how the sub address is used in the SETUP message 0 Station sub address not used 1 Sub address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP message 2 Sub address is filled in the CPSN Called Party Sub address Number field of SETUP DISA ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station is restricted to receive the DISA Restriction incoming call CLI Name ON OFF OFF If this field is ON the system checks whether the received CLI Display matches speed dial data If they match the speed dial name displays ISDN CLI STA Max 4 Logical If outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT this field used when digits STANo make outgoing CLI Progress ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON and an SLT seizes an ISDN line the progress Indication indication IE that indicates the originator is non ISDN device is made in the SETUP message ISDN CLIR ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON does not send CLI Information and restrict PX send it ISDN COLR ON OFF OFF If this field is set to ON does not send CLI Information and restrict PX send it DID ON OFF OFF Restrict the DID Call Restriction DID Call Wait ON OFF OFF New DID Call waiting indicator CLI Type 0 1 0 1 Long Use station CLI with PGM114 BTN19 max 12 0 Short Use station
133. ISDN CP ON OFF OFF Inband CLI Type 0 2 0 0 Normal 1 Long CLI 1 PGM 114 F21 2 Long CLI 2 PGM 114 F22 Reserved Screening 0 3 0 User Provided No S User Provided Pass User Provided Fail Network Provided Release 3 5 WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 49 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Line Attributes III PGM146 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Incoming ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON a prefix code will Prefix Code be attached in front of incoming CLI Insertion Outgoing ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a prefix code will Prefix Code be attached in front of outgoing CLI Insertion ISDN Line u Law A Law A Law This value is used to setthe ISDN CODEC Type Type Calling Sub ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the calling party Address sub address of the ISDN station is attached when an ISDN station makes an outgoing CO Call through this CO Line DID DGT 2 4 3 This value is used as count of the received Receive DID Digit number to route DID incoming Number Call DID Digit 4 digits gt When the DID Conversion Type PGM 143 Mask FLEX 4 is set to 0 the received DID digits are converted by this value The digits 0 9 can be entered means to ignore received digit and means to bypass the digit The length of DID Digit Mask is 4 e g 1234 is received when DID Digit Mask is set as
134. Index Table m E Voice Mailbox COS PGM 238 The system provides administrative options to create COS for voice mailboxes These COS can then be programmed to stations mailboxes on an individual basis Up to 5 COS may be programmed NOTES The default Class of Service for all mailboxes is 1 The parameters in COS 1 contain all default settings PGM 238 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Greeting Length 00 99 15 2 Message Record Time 001 600 secs 300 3 Number of Messages 01 250 50 4 Message Retention Time 01 99 days 15 5 E mail Notification Enable Disable Disable 6 Future Delivery Enable Disable Disable 7 Confirm Message Receipt Enable Disable Disable 8 Private Message Mark Enable Disable Enable Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 VoIB Programing 2 126 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Vol B Programing Vol B Programming PGM 340 Gate Keeper Attributes PGM 341 You can program the VoIB configuration GK Attributes with PC Admin VOIP Attribute PGM340 341 VOIP Slot Number H IP Address pooo ause ades GATEWAY Address p 00 Jorect a v GFndadkes SUENET Mack 255 255 255 0 GK Open H245 F DNS Address ooo GH245Tunelng GkRASSignalPert 00 9999 Defauk Codec kai gt GK Pregranted Arq o 0 9999 Defoukcin PI
135. LT 22 RSG LCO 22 RSG IP Phone 26 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 397 x The TX gain on the RSG can be adjusted Refresh Update Close Comment Range 0 63 IP Phone PGM397 DKT 26 SLT 33 CTR_SLT 22 WKT 26 ACO 33 CTR ACO 22 DCO 33 29 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Nation Specific 1 156 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Nation Specific You can control transfer sensitivity of another station or CO line for each kind of phone PGM 400 to PGM 423 These values depend on Nation specification DTI B Rx Gain Control PGM 400 SLI B Rx Gain Control PGM 401 ACOB Rx Gain Control PGM 404 DCOB Rx Gain Control PGM 406 VMI B Rx Gain Control PGM 407 DTRU Rx Gain Control PGM 408 EXT Page Rx Gain Control PGM 409 CPTU Rx Gain Control PGM 410 Release 3 5 XA veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 MODU Rx Gain Control 411 1 157 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin MODU Rx Gain Control PGM 411 Operation Click All Rx Gain Control and enter the values of gain control N A means not used with the system and such fields will not be changed automatically All Rx Gain Control PGM400 411 Ioi x Refresh update close ACOB DCOB TONE Music 1 Music 2 Modem DTI SPK To DTIB To SLIB To ACOB To DCOB To To DTRU To EXT PAGE To CPTU To MODU Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP
136. Location 1 assigned announcement which is played when the call is first received The announcement may be assigned as VMIB Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 99 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro UCD Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce greeting when the Location 2 assigned VMIB Announce 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires Timer sec 000 not assigned Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Overflow Destination Sta B The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Alt if no Member ON OFF OFF If there is no member on duty an ICM call will be dropped or an incoming CO call will be routed to the Attendant Mus
137. M Night Weekend COS fi Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DID DISA Destination 167 2 62 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro DI D DI SA Destination 167 A station can be programmed to forward a DID call to the Attendant if the station is busy Vacant or invalid calls are sent to the Main Attendant or a busy tone is presented depending on admin programming Operation Error Destination When a wrong number is pressed TONE A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group Busy Destination When a station is busy A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group No Answer Destination When there is no answer input a station group to be forwarded TONE A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group Reroute Busy Error NO Answer input a station group to be forwarded TONE A tone will be heard e ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 2 63 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Destination saver ae IU EET ea e
138. MIB if assigned VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce a greeting when the Location 1 assigned VMIB Announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce greeting when the Location 2 assigned VMIB Announce 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires sec 000 not assigned VMIB Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time No Answer Timer 00 99 15 In circular hunt calls to a station in the group will go to the sec station if unavailable or unanswered in this no answer time the call is directed to the next station in the group Pilot Hunt ON OFF ON A circular hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number the station group so that only calls to the
139. MIB MSG time Off On Off VMIB MSG type LIFO FIFO LIFO Outbound Notification Disable Enable Disable Outbound Notification CO Group 1 24 1 Outbound Notification Tel number 24 digits none Outbound Notification retry 1 9 2 Outbound Notification interval 1 60 minutes 3 Cascade destination Station Virtual MB none Cascade type NO cascading Imediately NO cascading When noti fails Urgent E mail Notification Off On Off Voicemail password max 11 digits none SMTP Server IP XXX XXX XXX XXX none E mail address max 50 characters none SMTP user ID max 24 characters none SMTP password max 24 characters none First Name max 12 characters none Last Name max 12 characters none Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Display Station with COS PGM 130 2 41 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Display Station with COS PGM 130 This feature is linked to Station COS PGM 116 CO Group Access Station PGM 131 This feature is linked Station COS PGM117 Refer to PGM 117 CO Group Access Display Hot Desk Attribute PGM 250 PGM 250 is used to configure the Hot desk feature CO Line Base Program Use this CO Line Base Program to change CO Line features The program number is from PGM140 to 144 CO Related Admin PGM CO Line List 140 141 142 143 146 147 This PC Admin links various features that are related to each other So you can move to another programming with a popup menu x Refresh Close
140. N P114 Auto Speaker Iv x ICM Group SIP U ID TBL fo 0 32 Call Forward lt Error Tone For TAD DND lt SLT Flash Drop Data Security r r Loop LCR Howling Tone to SLT km VMIB Slot ICM Box Signaling YMIBMSG Type LIFO No Touch Answer OFFNET Forward Page Access Forced HF Ring Type ek CIDSLT CAS GAIN 5 Speaker Ring Speaker m CIDSLT FSK GAIN 5 Speakerphone Iv Caller V OVER T Update All 2 clear Station Attributes Assignment 104 105 Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment 110 111 112 113 114 2 24 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation2 Several Station Attributes update 1 Change the admin field you want in Figure 4 2 2 Drag and drop several stations in the Station List PGM110 to Station Attributes Assignment area 3 Press the Update All button for updating If you again want another station press the Clear button e Station Attribute Refresh update dose Current Station Number Station Attributes PGM111 112 113 114 Attributes 1 PGM111 Attributes 11 PGM112 Attributes PGM113 Attribute ISDN PEM 14 sBefresh Station ID P3110 y Auto Speaker 7 ICM Group 1 seumr amp
141. N Connection Setup Type the IP Address of the SBX IP system then click OK 2 You can choose the site address using the combo box The combo box has the IP address list of sites that you have visited 3 If you want to connect to a site that has never been visited you must type the IP address into the combo box In this case you can t edit the port number Dialog for Lan Setting IP Address Port Number 0 Camel Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 File Transfer Menu 3 6 Chapter 3 Speed Editor File Transfer Menu When Speed Editor is logged onto the SBX IP System do not use a keyset for editing speed bin data Recommendation When speed editor accesses network drives opening and saving files can fail due to the network condition Therefore it is recommended that you copy files onto local drives LDK Spd Editor File Connection File Transfer Help amp Upoad Download 2000 Upload 1 Checkto see if the file that you want to upload is being used by another process If the file is open you cannot upload it 2 Select Upload sub menu in File Transfer menu 3 Select Browse and select a file to upload Click the OK button Upload LDK SpeedBin Speed Bin D Name File Browse Cancel Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 File Transfer Menu 3 7 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Downloa
142. N OFF ON If desired the privacy warning tone can be Warning Tone suppressed Single Ring YES NO NO Changes a cadence of ICM or incoming for CO Call CO ring In case of NO ICM 1sec on 4sec off CO 0 45 on 0 25 off 0 45 on 4sec off In case of YES the cadence is the reverse Reserved ACD Print ON 10s OFF Enable or disable ACD Print features Enable unit OFF ACD Print 001 255 001 Determines the amount of time between Timer repeated ACD database prints Zero means no print out 10 sec base vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 2 58 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Attributes Il PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Clear ACD ON OFF OFF Determines if ACD database initializes Database after print out after Print VMIB Prompt 00 31 08 To control prompt gain level Gain VM with CLI ON OFF OFF If the setting is ON CLI is added when Info Voice Mail information is printed through RS232 port by SMDI ACD Print 1 HOUR SEC Determines the unit of ACD Print timer of Timer Unit 0 SEC Flex Btn 10 1 hour or 10 seconds Set VM SMDI TYPE Il TYPE Set VM SMDI type Type TYPE Incoming Toll ON OFF OFF Enable or disable the toll check for Check incoming calls No DSS ENABLE DISABLE Enable or disable the LED of the CO Indication DISABLE button while ringing for incoming transfer and recalling It is not applied for direct ringing such as DID DIS
143. N OFF ON The system allows a conference with Conference multi CO lines Print LCR ON OFF OFF Print dialed digits or LCR conversed digits Conv Dgt in LCD A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 67 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Attributes PGM160 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Conference ON OFF ON When entering a conference members Warning Tone will receive a warning tone Off net ON OFF ON In case of Off net call forward Off net Prompt Usage prompt will be heard It only applies to CO to CO Transfer Off net DTMF ON OFF ON In case of Offnet call forward DTMF Tone Tone will be heard It only applies to CO to CO Transfer CO Voice IMM DGT DGT Option to connect voice path after seizing Path Connect CO line Immediately CIS and Korea only Transfer Tone RBT MOH RBT Option to provide ring back tone or MOH during transferring CO line CO to CO Xfer ON OFF OFF CPT Detect ACD Package ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ACD Information Usage is printable CO to CO UC ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the conference Timer Extend call user can extend the Unsupervised Conference Timer by dialing the UC TIMER EXTEND Code Call Log List 15 50 15 Number of call log entries Number SIP Pound ON OFF OFF Usage vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161
144. O xl amp cRefresh yjupdate Close Day COS 7 Night Weekend COS 7 2 Enter the COS numbers Release 3 5 W veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 1 74 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin DI D DI SA Destination PGM 167 A station can be programmed to forward a DID call to the Attendant if the station is busy Vacant or invalid calls are sent to the Main Attendant or a busy tone is presented as set by admin programming Operation DID DISA 167 Refresh Close Busy VMIB PROMPT USAGE Attendant Ring Assign Busy Prompt Usage Error Attendant Ring Assign Error Prompt Usage DND Prompt Usage No Answer No Answer Prompt Usage Attendant Ring Assign gt E 5 DND Destination ATD xfer Prompt Usage Attendant Ring Assign Reroute Busy Attendant Ring Assign ik Reroute Error Attendant Ring Assign ik Reroute No Answer Attendant Ring Assign ind Click DID DISA Destination Error Destination When a wrong number is pressed A tone will be heard ATD Call will be forwarded to the attendant Station Group Call will be forwarded to a station group Release 3 5 W vertica SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 External Control Contact 168 1 75 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Busy Destination When a station is busy TONE
145. ON ON Data Line Security Howling Tone to SLT ICM Box Signaling Mo Touch Answer Page Access Ring Type Speaker Ring Speaker Phone VMIB SLOT ICM Group Error Tone For SLT Flash Drop Loop LCR Account VMIB MSG OFFNET Call Forward Forced HF CIDSLT CAS GAIN CIDSLT FSK GAIN Caller V Over SIP User ID Table Listen Redial DTMF Cancel v v v v v v v v v v v vi v v 5 To edit the attribute right click and select the Edit Tool option The edit window will display and you can edit the attributes Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 23 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attribute I PGM111 Refresh update Close Edit Tool Station 102 _ lt gt _Edtok Edtokandnext _ Select All All Edit OK v Auto Speaker ON v ICM Group Call Forward Error Tone for TAD OFF v DND SLT FlashDrop Disable v Data Line Security Loop LCR amp ccount DFF v Howling Tone to SLT VMIB MSG Type LIFO ICM Box Signaling OFFNET Call Forward Enable No Touch Answer Forced HF Page Access CIDSLT CAS GAIN CIDSLT FSK GAIN Speaker Ring Caller V ver Speaker Phone is v SIP UserID Table VMIB SLOT o Listen Redial DTMF ON 6 After editing press the Update button to save the changed values m e 7 H 4 Ring Type
146. PGM 201 1 111 2 104 Conference Page Zone PGM 119 1 36 2 33 Configuration PGM 100 103 2 15 Connection Type 1 6 Connect LED 1 7 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 1 44 2 38 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 50 2 41 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 50 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 145 1 61 CO to CO COS PGM 166 1 73 2 61 CPTU Rx Gain Control PGM 410 1 156 2 138 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 1 125 2 115 D DB File List Not Used 2 13 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 1 100 2 86 DCOB Rx Gain Control PGM 406 1 156 2 138 DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 1 98 2 84 Desktop 2 12 Detail Program Information 2 7 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 1 74 2 62 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 1 160 2 142 Display Station with COS PGM 130 1 49 2 41 Distinct CO Ring Frequency PGM 422 1 161 2 143 DTIB Rx Gain Control PGM 400 1 156 2 138 Release 3 5 WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Index IND ii DTRU Rx Gain Control PGM 408 1 156 2 138 E Emergency Code Table PGM 226 1 122 2 113 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 1 127 2 117 External Control Contact PGM 168 1 75 2 64 EXT Page Rx Gain Control PGM 409 1 156 2 138 F Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 1 30 2 31 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 1 128 2 118 G Gate Keeper Programming PGM 341 1 146 Gatekeeper Programming PGM 341 2 126 General Descripti
147. PGM174 4 Print Serial Port Selection PGM175 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM176 SMDR Attributes PGM177 System Date Time PGM178 Release 3 5 WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Level Management Administrator Only 1 9 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 2 Press New button to assign a new level 3 Enter the level that you want to add Duplicated levels are not allowed After entering a level you can select the features that you want to disable with the assigned level If you disable a feature the user who has this level cannot see the menu in the menu list It is possible to select the menu by medium category For example PGM108 111 141 etc You cannot assign a main category such as or Station Base programming 4 After configuration press the SAVE button to save changes Use All clear to clear the entire level of data Use Delete to delete one feature Tip for backup level database There are two cases where you may need to restore the database or setup multiple customers to the same level database Case 1 When you want restore the database after installing the PC Admin again Case 2 When you want to setup the same level data to various customers In other words you can fix several levels and apply this configuration to all customers Refer to below instruction Backup and restoring the level database requires the use of two files Lmaster cd
148. Path Setting or change the path 7 Click the Next Button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installation of the Offline PCAdminPro Software 2 5 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro The Installing SBX PCAdminPro window appears 9 SBX PCAdminPro Ver InstallShield Wizard Installing SBX PCAdminPro Ver A 0Aa The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs SBX PCAdminPro Ver 4 04a This may take several minutes Status InstallShield The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed SBX PCAdminPro Ver Click Finish to exit the wizard Launch the program 8 To end the Installation process click the Finish button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Remove Software 2 6 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Remove Software To remove program 1 Click Start point to Settings click Control Panel and then click on Add or Remove Programs The item can be seen in the Change or Remove Programs tab 2 Click the Remove button to remove the program Run Program To start the program click Start point to Programs click the SBX PCAdminPro Folder and then click the SBX PCAdminPro icon Procedure for using Offline PCAdminPro 1 Install the SBX PCAdminPro Package for DB Updown upload 2 Download the DB File usr from the MP System with DB Upload Down
149. Port View Port Num NAT IP Address NAT Port No STUN Enabl 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None ID Password Update Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Phone Attributes 386 1 154 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Set MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 A 00 CB MUTE D DND E FLASH F 2 IP Address Display 0 0 0 0 Display Only 3 Port View zz N A Display Only 4 Port Number Display Only 5 NAT IP Address Display m 0 0 0 0 Display Only 6 NAT Port Number 0 Display Only 7 Stun Enabled None Display Only 8 CTI IP Address Skip 0 0 0 0 9 IPSEC Usage ON OFF OFF 10 Outside NAT Firewall ON OFF OFF 11 User ID Max of 12 Can be used by Nomad SP user characters 12 User Password Max of 12 Can be used by Nomad SP user characters Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 396 1 155 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin RSG RX Gain Control PGM 396 The RX gain on the RSG can be adjusted lt Update Close Comment Value Range 0 63 96 26 SLT 33 CTR SLT 22 WKT 26 ACO 33 CTR_ACO 22 DCO 33 29 8 32 MUSIC 1 29 MUSIC 2 29 RSG DKT 26 RSG S
150. RK R2 Disappear Timer 01 50 14 sec R2 Pulse Timer 01 30 07 In R2 signaling time duration to send pulse typed R2 20ms signal R2 Ready Timer 000 500 007 20ms Dial Tone Delay Timer 01 30 20 Line Status 1 9 6 Free Line Calling Category 1 9 1 User no priority ANI Request ON OFF OFF ON Caller ID Service CLI Digits Number 01 10 04 R2 Out Digits Timer 01 50 05 R2 Error Prompt ON OFF OFF zi R2 Busy Prompt ON OFF OFF R2 Annc Prompt Usage ON OFF OFF Gain 01 63 32 Release 3 5 vertical SBX PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 2 86 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM187 This feature is for R2 DCOB programming e DCOB Line Attributes Sefresh update 00 CO Line List RIMEC R2MFC R2MFC R2MFC R2MFC R2MFC RIMEC RIMEC R2MFC R2MFC R2MFC R2MFC DCOB CO Ine Attribute PGI187 IN Digt x QUT Digk Type No of CLI Digits 1 15 DCOB CO Snd S Block OMD Boc d O Q f Operation 1 Setthe value of admin field 2 For several CO modification click popup menu by right clicking as shown in the following graphic Then you can assign the range of CO Line or All CO 3 Press the Update button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB Line Attributes PGM187 2 87 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Sele
151. SYSTEM CO LINE CO GROUP NET NUMBER SBX IP 1 12 1 24 Index number in Networking PGM 324 00 72 You must enter the index number in networking PGM 324 00 72 Otherwise the SBX IP system may not work properly Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Editing Text or Doc File 3 9 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Editing Text or Doc File Open the file you want to edit using Notepad or MicroSoft Word The file format looks similar to the following 588 2888 Dave Kim CO Line 1 17184561973 2001 2882 Jerry CO 5 12355678 number 500 on the first line represents the total number of speed data entries contained within this file Each item is separated by a separator Speed No Speed Name CO Line Type CO Number Phone Number e When you write CO Line Type write CO Line CO Group and None keeping an empty space between CO and Line between CO and Group Do not exceed 16 characters when entering the Speed Name Do not exceed 24 characters when entering the Phone Number Recommend editing in Speed Editor View Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Editing Excel File 3 10 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Editing Excel File 1 Open the file you want to edit using Excel The file format looks similar to the following ER P EE EE RE UserName PhoneNum CO Type CO Num Dave Kim CO Line 1 17184561973 None Jerry CO Line
152. TA No making outgoing CLI MSN Wait ON OFF OFF New virtual MSN call waiting enable Long CLI 1 Max 16 Long Digits CLI 1 Long CLI 2 Max 16 Long Digits CLI 2 CC Blocking ON OFF ON Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 1 30 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 This feature is to enable programming flexible button and copy feature PGM 125 Select Flexible button assignment from the popup menu and the configuration window displays Operation 1 Select Flex Button Assignment 2 Click the Update button to edit data Flex Button Assignment PGM115 125 ali xj Refresh Close Current Station Copy To DSS PGM125 Flex Button Type Value E 1 STA PGM BTN Individual Defined Key STA BTN Individual Defined Key xx Button 1 xx Button e xx Button 3 xx Button 4 LOOP Grp xx D C qq amp Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned m Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 1 31 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 3 Toassign another function to a flex button double click on the row of the flex button The following dialog window displays Flex Button Assignment PGM115 125 ioi xi Auto Increment Auto Copy
153. Then a second window will display for editing or adding station group data Also you can assign the attributes of each group with Attribute Assign menu of popup menu This window is displayed on the next page Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 102 Station Group PGM190 191 fa 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 BSS SSS Refresh Close Update Attribute Assign Circular Not Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assigned Station Group Update Tool 102 103 Assigned Station List OF si Station List Group ezo Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Member 101 102 Group Type 103 Circula Pick up Attribute vl AE Update Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 103 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin You can change the location of a group member using Up Down key Then PC Admin will send the changed order of stations to the MPB and the MPB will save with the new order of stations Station Group Attribute Assign PGM191 Cif x Refresh Update Close Group 520 Type Circular Pick up Attribute ON Announce 1 Timer
154. Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 1 134 2 122 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 1 133 2 121 WTIB Rx Gain Control PGM 403 2 138 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010
155. X Access Code PGM 172 1 80 PBX Access Code PGM 172 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin You can make an outside call through the station A maximum of 4 PABX Access Codes are assignable A PABX Access Code is a 1 or 2 digit number By default PABX Access Codes are not assigned Operation 1 Enter a 1 or 2 digit code in the window If you want to delete a code leave blank 2 Click on the Update button to save the changes PBX Access Code PGMI 1512 Refresh update Close PBX Access Code 1 PBX Access Code 2 PBX Access Code 3 PBX Access Code 4 LJ L LJ LJ Max 2 digit include and Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Preferred Line Answer PLA Priority 173 1 81 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Preferred Line Answer PLA Priority PGM 173 You may set up the priority for the order in which calls are received Operation 1 Click PLA Priority Each item has the following meaning Use the dropdown box in order to assign each call type by the desired priority XFR Transfer Call REC Recall INC Incoming Call QUE Queued Call You cannot assign a duplicated number If you try to assign a duplicated number and click Update the program automatically reassigns the priority 2 Press the Update button to save the changes PLA Priority PGM173 lol xl Refresh update Close Priority Set
156. able m Announce action Previous v VMIB MSG password OFF s MSG time OFF MSG type LIFO Y Outbound notification Disable E Outbound notification CO Group Outbound notification Tel number J Outbound notification retry Outbound notification interval min Cascade destination NO cascadi v Cascade type E mail Notification Voicemail password max 11 digits v SMTP Server IP v E mail address max 50 characters SMTP user ID max 24 characters SMTP password mas 24 characters First name max 12 characters Ii gt Last 12 characters Release 3 5 VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 1 48 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Virtual Mailbox Attibutes PGM129 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT Admin Disable Enable Disable VMIB Access Disable Enable Disable COS 1 5 1 5 1 Announce only Disable Enable Disable Announce action Hang up Previous Previous VMIB MSG password Off On Off VMIB MSG time Off On Off VMIB MSG type LIFO FIFO LIFO Outbound Notification Disable Enable Disable Outbound Notification CO Group 1 24 1 Outbound Notification Tel number 24 digits none Outbound Notification retry 1 9 2 Outbound Notification interval 1 60 minutes 3 Cascade destination Station Virtual MB none Cascade
157. al CO All lines are assigned as normal CO lines by default Each CO line in the system can be programmed as a DISA Direct Inward System Access line and the DISA types are as follows Flex BTN 1 Day 2 Night 3 Weekend 4 On Demand Each DISA type BTN 1 3 has sub attributes F1 DISA Service On Off F2 VMIB Message No Voice announcement VMIB Message can be assigned 00 70 and it is not assigned 00 as default Reserved B ISDN DID MSN Reserved zx DCO DID DCO DID Line This type will be valid in a few countries For example Korea CO Line Attributes I PGM141 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line 00 25 01 Groups should be assigned according to Group CO type and Class Of Service CO COS 1 5 1 CO COS 1 no restriction DISA Account Code CO Line Assign CO COS 2 Exception Table A governs CO COS 3 Exception Table B governs CO COS 4 restricts Long Distance Code CO COS 5 overrides STA COS 2 3 4 and 5 6 ON OFF ON When accessing another CO line in the system by DISA line you should enter authorization code if this flag is set POL LOOP LOOP Polarity Reverse Loop Start Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 45 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro CO Line Attributes I PGM141 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line Type PBX CO CO When marked PBX a 1 or 2 digit dial code may be entered after which toll restriction is applied
158. and Group Attributes will be displayed automatically 3 If you want add or edit the station group change the Group type and press the Type Update button before pressing the Update button Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 90 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Group wcRefresh update ticlose Station Group PGM190 Station Group Attributes PGM191 Group Number 620 Group Type P Ieee 2 A Pick up Attribute 4 When the station group type is changed it will display the default value of the attributes Then you can assign the attributes of the group Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 91 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Refresh update Cose Station Group PGM190 Station Group Attributes PGM191 Group Number 20 Group Type por see Pick up Attribute Circular Terminal Ring UCD voice Mad Pick Up Station Group VMIB Announce 1 Timer 5 0 999 sec Overflow Timer 80 0 600 sec VMIB Announce 2 Timer 0 0 999 se wrapuprme fe 2 999 sec VMIB Announce 1 Location 0 70 NoAnswerTme 5 0 99 sec VMIB Announce 2 Location O 0 70 Plot Hunt VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer 0 0 999 sec Akif No Member VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Music Source Assigned Akernate destination Station Group MaxQueuedCalCou
159. apter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Print Prot Data PGM 451 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Flexible Numbering Plan Print Station Database Print STA R CO Line Database Print CO R System Feature Database Print Station Group Database Print Reserved System Timer Database Print Toll Table Database Print E LCR Database Print m Other Tables Print 2 E Nation Specific Database Print Flexible Button Program Print STA_R All Database Print Networking Data E Print Quit Release 3 5 XA veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro General Description I ntroduction to Offline PCAdminPro SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro is a software Administration Program for the SBX IP system which controls the functions and values of the SBX IP system using usr file downloaded by the DB Up Download Program indirectly This DB Up Download Program is included in the Online PC Admin program package Hardware Software Requirements Requirements of the SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro system and PC are SBX IP system e PC e Pentium Ill CPU 550 Mhz minimum e 128 MB minimum Minimum 3 button Mouse VGA Monitor MS Windows 98 minimum HDD 20 MB minimum Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Version Compatibility 2 2 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdmi
160. art End Day Station Range Delay 0 Auto FWD Update Close Delete Ring Assignment Release 3 5 b VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO CID Attributes PGM 147 1 62 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO CID Attributes PGM 147 User can assign some attributes related with CID setting Operation 1 Click CO CIDU Attribute 2 Enterthe CO range for which you want to program CID attributes Then current values will be displayed 3 Select or enter each field and press the Update button to save data This menu was linked in other CO programming field CO CID Attribute PGM147 Refresh Close coum COList cCOAtrI coate CO Num CID Mode Select CID Name Display 1 Update Tool CID Made Select CID Name Display sz Update Close Select All v Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 1 63 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO CIDU Attribute PGM147 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CID Mode OFF FSK FSK Select DTMF CID Name NAME TEL TEL Analog CO line CLI carries the caller s Display telephone number and name According to this ADMIN program value LCD displayed data can be selected If this value is set to NAME the caller s name and telephone number will display on the LCD If this value is set to TELEPHONE NUMBER the caller s t
161. ate 10 pps 66 33 60 40 20 pps 60 40 20 pps 66 33 Seize Time 0 127 3 20ms Release Time 0 127 7 20ms IASG Mode DTMF Pulse DTMF Ring 2 9 2 Detection Time 10 Ring Stop 10 60 60 Time 100ms Collect Digit 1 6 3 Store Time 1 15 15 sec Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Base Program 1 65 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Base Program Use the System Base Program to change any system features System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 This area of programming changes system attributes Operation 1 Select System Attributes in main menu The System Attribute window will be display and you can select System Attribute II or III by pressing each button 2 After editing press the Update button to save the changes System Attributes PGM160 161 163 5 Refresh Sdupdate close Attribute Attribute ATD Call Queuing Ring Back Tone MOH Camp On MOH Ring Back Tone M CO Line Choice LAST DISA Retry Count 3 1 ICM Continuous Dial Tone CONT z CO Dial Tone Detect a External Night Ring E Hold Preference System 7 Multi line Conference Iv SMDR Print LCR Convert LI Conference Warning Tone Offnet Prompt Usage Offnet Tone Iv CO Voice Path Connect DGT Y Transfer Tone RBT 7 Reserved ACD PACKAGE USAGE LI CO TO CO UC Timer Extend Call Lo
162. ation board you should enter the slot to the station window 3 If you want to change the order of slots use Up and Down button to change the order of the boards After editing press the Update button to save changed values If you want to remove it select a slot number below COL board STA board or VMIB and click the left arrow button Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Logical Slot Assignment PGM 103 1 16 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin In the case of VOIBE if you select VOIBE slot into any type of COL STA type it will be added in the other slot type For example if you select a VOIBE slot in COL board type the PC Admin software will add the VOIBE slot to the STA board type automatically Logical Assignment PGM103 air xl Refresh S Update Close System Reset Board Information COL Board STA Board Logical Slot Assignment Window 1 HYBRID 2 HYBRID 3 UNPOPULATED 4 UNPOPULATED 5 CLCOB4 6 7 8 CLCOB4 UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED Append to COL Append to STA Append to VMIB UNPOPL Figure 1 1 DIP Switch Configuration for Slot Assignment PGM103 ITEM COL board REMARK DIP ON Manually DIP OFF Automatically STA board DIP ON Manually DIP OFF Automatically VMIB DIP ON Manually DIP OFF Automatically Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June
163. ative options to create COS for voice mailboxes These COS can then be programmed to stations mailboxes on an individual basis Up to 5 COS may be programmed NOTES The default Class of Service for all mailboxes is 1 The parameters in COS 1 contain all default settings Yoice Mailbox COS Table PGM238 Mi E3 Refresh COS m length 0 ecord time 1 Number of message 1 250 Message Email noti Future de Confirm nl Private ml 1 15 300 50 15 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 2 15 300 50 15 ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 3 15 300 50 15 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 4 15 300 50 15 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 5 15 300 50 15 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE Update Tool cos hn Greeting length 0 99 sec 15 Message record time 1 600 sec 300 Number of message 1 250 50 Message retention time 1 99 days 5 Email notification Future delivery Confirm message receipt v Private message mark Update Delete Close 238 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Greeting Length 00 99 15 2 Message Record Time 001 600 secs 300 3 Number of Messages 01 250 50 4 Message Retention Time 01 99 days 15 5 E mail Notification Enable Disable Disable 6 Future Delivery Enable Disable Disable 7 Confirm Message Receipt Enable Disable Disable 8 Private Message Mark Enable Disable Enable Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Network
164. blishes the amount of time before a call placed on Timer 3 digits sec exclusive hold will recall the station placing the hold I Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time before a call recalls the 3 digits sec attendant System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time before a call placed on 3 digits sec system hold will recall the station placing the hold Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 030 Establishes the amount of time a transferred call will ring 3 digits sec at the station receiving the transfer and how long it will recall the station transferring the call ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 030 When the ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no 3 digits sec available CO Line in the group this timer is invoked When the ACNR Delay Timer expires invoke the ACNR Pause Timer if there is still no available CO line ACNR is activated ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 030 This Timer is invoked after system detects CO ring back 2 digits sec tone or voice from a CO party After this timer the system retries ACNR ACNR Pause Timer 005 300 030 When this timer expires ACNR is activated 3 digits sec For CIS 5 300 ACNR Retry Counter 01 30 03 This counter decreases every time the station retries ACNR ACNR is canceled if set to 0 For CIS 1 9 ACNR Retry No Tone 1 9 1 1 represents 5 seconds the system will wait this value to 1 digit bsec decide NO TONE 3 represents 15 seconds Only for CIS
165. c R2 ERROR PROMPT USAGE R2 BUSY PROMPT LISAGE p R2 ANNC PROMPT USAGE DCO Gain 1 63 1 Select DCOB System Attributes Current programmed data will display 2 You can change values in this window After changing press the Update button to save the changes Note This feature only applies to a few countries Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 DCOB System Attributes 186 1 99 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin DCOB System Attributes PGM 186 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DCOB CO Type 0 2 2 0 Sweden Cyprus This is actually 1 Italy programmed in PGM187 2 Korea Australia BTN4 Metering Type 0 1 0 0 Not used 1 When a Metering signal is received R2 OUT Manage Timer 01 50 14 In R2 signaling maximum time for waiting for forward sec signal from PX R2 IN Manage Timer 01 50 14 In R2 signaling maximum time for waiting for forward sec signal from PX R2 Disappear Timer 01 50 14 B sec R2 Pulse Timer 01 30 07 In R2 signaling time duration to send pulse typed R2 20ms signal R2 Ready Timer 000 500 007 ES 20ms Dial Tone Delay Timer 01 30 20 Line Status 1 9 6 Free Line Calling Category 1 9 1 User no priority ANI Request ON OFF OFF ON Caller ID Service CLI Digits Number 01 10 04 R2 Out Digits Timer 01 50 05 R2 Error Prompt ON OFF OFF R2 Busy Prompt ON OFF OFF R2 Annc Prompt Usage ON OFF OFF Gain 0
166. call Timer 0 300 1sec 60 click the Update I Hold Recall Timer 0 300 1sec 30 Tool to change a System Hold Recall Timer 0 300 1sec 30 value 7 Transfer Recall Timer 0 300 1sec 30 ACNR Delay Timer 0 300 1sec 30 ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 15 30 ACNR Pause Timer 5 300 1sec 30 ACNR Retry Counter 1 30 3 ACNR No Tone Retry Counter 1 9 1 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 1 300 15 30 14 Automatic CO Release Timer 20 300 1sec 30 CCR Inter Digit Timer 0 255 100 30 CO Call Drop Warning Timer 0 99 15 10 Reserved 18 CO Dial Delay Timer 0 99 100msec 1 CO Release Guard Timer 1 150 100msec 20 CO Ring Off Timer 10 150 100msec 60 CO Ring OM Timer 1 9 100msec 2 Warning Tone Timer 60 900 1sec 180 Call Forward No Answer Timer 0 255 1sec 15 DID DISA No Answer Timer 0 99 15 25 25 WMIB User Record Timer 10 255 15 20 Ea VMIB Valid User Message Timer 0 9 15 4 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 1 91 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers PGM 180 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Attendant Recall Timer 00 60 01 Establishes the amount of time before the system 2 digits min disconnects the call Call Park Recall Timer 000 600 120 Establishes the amount of time before a call placed in a 3 digits sec call park location will recall the station placing the park Camp on Recall Timer 000 200 030 If a
167. ction CO Num Al CO y 12 DCOB CO line Attribute PGM187 IN Digit Type azwrc OUT Digit Type R2MFC No of CLI Digits fio 1 15 DCOB CO 2korea Snd S Block CMD DCOB CO Line Attributes PGM 187 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK IN Digit Type 0 2 2 Default R2MFC 2 To set type 0 PULSE 1 2 R2MFC OUT Digit Type 0 2 2 Default R2MFC 2 To set type 0 PULSE 1 2 R2MFC Number of CLI Digits 01 15 10 DCOB Type 0 2 2 0 Cyprus 1 Italy 2 Korea Send S Block Cmd ON OFF OFF Release 3 5 1 SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group 2 88 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Group You can group stations together and make an idle station in a group to response to a call Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 Stations in the system can be grouped so that incoming calls will search hunt for an idle station in the group Three hunting processes can be assigned Circular Terminal or UCD Uniform Call Distribution Each of the system s groups is assigned as a function Call Pick Up Group and or Hunt Group Voice Mail Group and Ring Group The available group number and station number in a group is as follows Number of Groups System 10 Stations Group 26 A station can belong to any number of Pickup groups but can only belong to one Station Hunt group Voice mai
168. d 1 Check to see if the file that you want to download is being used by another process If the file is open you cannot download it 2 Select Download sub menu in File Transfer menu 3 Select a Range If you select User Specified enter the range manually in the boxes below the User Specified radio button Select Browse and name a file you want the speed data to be saved 5 Click OK button to start download Download LDK SpeedBin Speed Bin Select Range Enter Range From 2000 To 4999 File Name File IEEE Browse Cancel Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Editing Data 3 8 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Editing Data Editing in Speed Editor View LDK Spd Editor ini File E Connection C File Transfer T Help H BOE Kim 17184561973 2002 Perryl 2003 2004 2006 None 2007 None 2008 None 2009 1 Click on an empty cell 2 Type the data and press tab to move on to next column or click on the next column 3 Select the Save File sub menu in the File menu gt the Save Dialog displays 4 Select the file type text doc or Excel 5 Click the OK button Enter the correct CO Line CO Group Number Network index number otherwise the Speed Editor will ignore the CO Numbers during uploading and the CO Line Type and CO Number will not be updated
169. e Attribute PGM 322 Operation 1 Click Networking CO Line Attribute Then default setting will be displayed 2 Click the Update Tool to change attributes in popup menu After changing each field press the Update button to save changes Networking CO Line Attribute PGM322 Si Refresh Close conum CO ISDNAttr CO Num Networking CO Group Networking CO Line Type Gatekeeper Usage VOIP Mode Mode 1 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF 2 0 PSTM OFF H 323 Inband DTMF 8 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF 4 0 PSTM OFF H 323 Inband DTMF B 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF 5 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF b 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF 8 0 PSTN OFF H 323 Inband DTMF Update Tool Select All vw CO Num v Networking CO Group VOIP Mode 23 v Networking CO Line Type PSTN Mode Inband DTMF 0 Y vr v Gatekeeper Usage Update Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 1 142 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Net CO Group 00 24 00 Networking CO group programming for Networking call 2 VOIB Mode H 323 SIP This admin program establishes which protocol is used among H 323 or SIP at each VOIP CO line 3 Gatekeeper Usage ON OFF OFF 4 Net CO Line Type QSIG PSTN PSTN 5 DTMF Mode
170. e a CO Line 01 24 To seize a CO Line Group 100 131 To call another station Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Account Group 124 2 37 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro SMDR Account Group PGM 124 Stations can be assigned as a member of a call account group on SMDR A station belongs to only one call account group The system supports 99 SMDR Account Groups All stations are not assigned as a member of any Call Account Group by default SMDR Account Group Bl isl E3 cRefresh S4uUpdate 9 tClose SMDR Account Group PGM124 Account Group Not Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Mot Assigned Mot Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Copy DSS Button PGM 125 2 38 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Copy DSS Button PGM 125 The assigned DSS button of a DKTU can be copied to another station or ICM group This does not apply to DSS BOX Doorbox Operation 1 Click the Copy DSS Button 2 Enter the station number and select the type of destination You can select two types of destinations One is station and the other is ICM Group 3 Press the Update button to save the data Copp 05S Button PGM125 a E fo ioe Group 2 3
171. e type of CO line is PULSE instead of DTMF it decides pulse dial ratio Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ITEM RANGE DEFAULT Off line SMDR Statistics Print 01 11 COM 1 01 Admin Print 01 11 COM 1 01 Traffic 01 11 COM 1 01 SMDI Print 01 11 COM 1 01 Call Information 01 11 COM 1 01 Info On line SMDR 01 11 COM 1 01 Trace 01 11 COM 1 01 Debug 01 11 COM 1 01 PC Admin 01 11 Auto Select Display Only PC Attendant 01 11 NET PCATD 08 CTI 01 11 NET CTI 09 Remote Diagnostic N A Not Supported If you select the MODU for PC Admin connection port speed is limited to 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 REMARK COM1 COM2 MODU TELNET 1 TELNET 2 TELNET 3 Reserved NET_PCADM NET_PCATD NET CTI NET REMOTE Not Supported 9600 bps If you select a value greater than 9600 bps you might experience connection problems Operation 1 2 Click Pulse Dial Speed Ratio Change the ratio Pulse Dial Speed Ratio P Refresh SUupdate close Pulse Dial Ratio 66 33 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Attributes 177 1 86 SMDR Attributes PGM 177 The Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls As an assignable database option if Long Distance All Call is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance ca
172. el click the Cancel button The Welcome to the Install Shield Wizard for SBX PCAdminPro window will appear i SBX PCAdminPro Ver InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for SBX PCAdminPro Ver A 0Aa The InstallShield R Wizard will install 58x PCAdminPro Ver 4 04a on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties lt Back Cancel 3 Click the Next button Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installation of the Offline PCAdminPro Software 2 4 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro The Customer Information window will appear ji SBX PCAdminPro Ver A 0Aa InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Organization vertical Communications Install this application For Anyone who uses this computer all users C Only For me IT Dept Installshield lt Back Cancel 4 Input your name and your organization 5 Click the Next button The Destination Folder window will appear m SBX PCAdminPro 4 0Aa InstallShield Wizard Destination Folder Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different Folder Install 5BX PCAdminPro Ver 4 04a to C Program Files LG Nortel SBx PCAdminPro A 0Aal Change Installshield x Back Cancel 6 Confirm the Current
173. elease 3 5 W vertica SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR DMT Table 222 1 117 7 CO Group Select a CO Group 8 Alternative DMT index If there is no CO group to select select alternative DMT index to be used 0 99 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Digit Modification Table PGM 222 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Bin Number 00 99 Added Digit Stream 25 digits None Normal digits 0 9 Special characters CALLBK Pause DND FOR Dial tone detection instead of pause FLASH Billing code Extension Number Removal Position 01 12 01 Index to CD stream in Lead table to be removed Number of Digits to be 00 12 00 Remove digits in CD stream up to this amount Removed Add Position 01 13 01 Establishes the position of the CD stream after removal where the stream will be inserted CO Group 01 24 01 Establishes which CO group is used for LCR dialing Alternative DMT Index 00 99 None Establishes an alternative DMT index when there is no idle CO line in CO group Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 1 118 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin LCR Table nitialization 223 This feature initializes Day Zone 1 2 3 in the LDT and all CO groups in the DMT Operation 1 Click LCR Table Initialization Click Day Zone 1 3 Select DMT index 0 99 and press Initialize button to initialize 2 Select a CO
174. elephone number will displayed on the LCD T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM152 x Refresh close Range Pause Duration sec Release Guard Time 100ms DT Delay Timer 100ms nterdigit Timer 20ms Wink Timer 20ms Outpulsing Rate Seize 1 2 20 10 15 10 10pps 60 40 3 2 2 20 10 15 10 10pps 60 40 3 3 2 20 10 15 10 10pps 60 40 3 4 2 20 10 15 10 10pps 60 40 3 5 2 20 10 15 10 10 60 40 3 6 2 20 10 15 10 10pps 60 40 3 7 20 10 15 10 10 60 40 3 m 4 Update Tool v Pause Duration sec Relase Time 20ms F CO Num sec Update fi Release Guard Time 100ms zo 7 1456 Mode IV DT Delay Timer 100ms 10 Ring Detection Time 10 Close Interdigit Timer 20ms 15 v Ring Stop Time 100ms feo Select All 7 Wink Timer 20ms 10 v M Collect Digit v Outpulsing Rate 10 5 60 40 7 Store Time sec 15 v Seize Time 20ms E Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 1 64 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin T1 CO Line Attribute PGM152 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Pause 1 9 2 Duration Release 1 60 20 Guard Time 100ms DT Delay 2 50 10 Timer 100ms Interdigit 15 30 15 Timer 20ms Wink Timer 7 15 10 20ms Outpulsing 10 pps 60 40 10 pps R
175. ent time to clear down the circuit Not currently implemented DT Delay Timer 100ms 2 50 10 The DT Dial tone Delay timer defines the duration that dial tone must be received for DT recognition Interdigit Timer 20ms 15 30 15 The Inter Digit timer defines the duration between digit transmissions Wink Timer 20ms 7 15 10 For TIE or DID Lines the Wink timer defines the length of time the wink T1 TIE line circuit reversal will last Outpulsing Rate 10 pps 60 40 10 pps For Pulse signaling defines the duration and 10 pps 66 33 60 40 make break ratio of each pulse 20 pps 60 40 20 pps 66 33 Seize Time 20ms 0 127 3 This timer defines the length of a valid line seizure signal Release Time 20ms 0 127 7 For Ground Start Lines defines the minimum length of time ground will not be applied to the TIP side from the PSTN IASG Mode DTMF Pulse DTMF Incoming Address Signaling Type defines the type of signaling DTMF or Pulse expected Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Base Program 2 54 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro T1 CO Line Attribute PGM152 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring Detection Time 10 2 9 2 The Ring DTC detect timer defines the minimum acceptable length of the Ring on time during a ring cycle Ring Stop Time 100ms 10 60 60 The Ring Stop timer defines the maximum Ring off time during a ring cycle Co
176. er Call lt SRefresh S4update Close REC Recall e Incoming Call e QUE Queued Call PLA Priority Setting PGM173 Priority Value t Transfer Call You may not assign a duplicated number REC Recall RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 INC Incoming Call You can set up RS 232C port configuration QuE Queued Call Note If you use COM2 as MODU MODEM interface the maximum speed is limited to 9600bps If you use COM1 for PC Admin the maximum speed is limited to 19200bps Operation Default values are shown below for each port ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Baud Rate 0 7 19200 0 N A 1 N A 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud CTS RTS ON OFF OFF P Break ON OFF OFF LPP 001 199 060 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 2 70 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 You can change the usage of the print serial port You can change the various input ports for applications Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro xc Refresh SUupdate Close Print Port Selection PGM175 Off line SMDR Statistics Print Admin Print come Traffic ow z Refer to the following table and change the values SMDI Print come Ez Call InFormation come Info On line SMDR come come xl Debug
177. eration 4 Attributes xc Refresh 5dupdate Close SMDR Attributes PGM177 Save Enable Print Incoming Call MSG Print on SMDR Print Enable nu Print Lost Call Print Called Number Records In Detail Iv Record Type fai Call 7 Long Distance Call Digit Counter 07 15 Hidden Dialed Digit 0 9 SMDR Currency Unit 3 characters SMDR Decimal Location 0 5 SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse Must 6 digit Start Timer 15 000 250 SMDR Hidden Digit RIGHT bat Long Distance Code 1 Max 2 digits Long Distance Code 2 Max 2 digits Long Distance Code 3 Max 2 digits Long Distance Code 4 Max 2 digits Long Distance Code 5 Max 2 digits Release 3 5 WX verticac SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Attributes 177 2 72 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Refer to the following table and enter the desired values SMDR Attributes PGM 177 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SMDR Save Enable ON OFF OFF The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls ALL or only limit set by timer in Btn12 SMDR Start Timer SMDR Print Enable ON OFF OFF The system can be set to real time print either all outgoing calls ALL or only limit set by timer in Btn12 SMDR Start Timer Long Distance Call LD AII Call LD The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls Reco
178. ertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 2 142 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 User entered frequency may be changed to the closest system frequency provided Differential Ring Freq ES c Refresh Slupdate Close Differential Ring Frequency PGM421 Ring 1 T1 1000HzZ Ring 1 T2 102002 Ring2 T1 0 Ring 2 T2 o10Hz Ring 3 T1 1260 2 Ring 3 T2 12600z Ring 4 T1 Ring 4 T2 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring 1 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 2 0000 9999 TigsT2r Nation Specific Ring 3 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 4 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Distinct CO Ring Frequency 422 2 143 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Distinct CO Ring Frequency PGM 422 User entered frequency may be changed to the closest system frequency provided Distinct Ring Freque Pim ES sSRefresh S4update Close Distinct Ring Frequency PGM 422 Ring 1 T1 Ring 1 T2 Ring 2 T1 Ring 2 T2 Ring 3 T1 Ring 3 T2 Ring 4 T1 Ring 4 T2 Distinct Ring Frequency PGM 422 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring 1 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 2 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 3 00
179. for database protected 5 You can put any name in the Customer Site Name box up to 23 characters Both characters and number are available You can enter lowercase characters Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Slot Assignment PGM 101 1 14 Slot Assignment PGM 101 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin The SBX IP system supports a max of 10 slots This program assigns each slot to one type of the boards Slot Assignment is possible by the system automatically or by the PC Admin program manually If the dipswitch is off the system automatically senses the board If the dipswitch is on you have to assign each board to the slot where it is placed Then reset the system The PC Admin software shows the same shape GUI type for slot configuration 3 4 7 8 womonr in wo 0 0 1 l Operation m a RISE Refresh Close 1 Right click in the upper area of the PC Admin window to dispay a menu then click Configuration The configuration window displays similar to that shown above The window is a GUI type and it will display the correct slot numbers automatically 2 With this window you can add delete slots by GUI screen and mouse operation If you want to add or delete a slot right click on the slot with the mouse Then a sub menu will display Configuration PGM101 103 2 x lt SRefresh Close 7 del LiL V
180. fter entering all data press the Update button on the Update Tool panel Release 3 5 WW verTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 1 39 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 This feature lets a station perform a pre assigned feature as soon as lifting the handset or pressing the SPEAKER button as if a station selects the feature Hot Line On the other hand Idle Line Selection for a station which is assigned to a warm line is activated when you take no action for Warm Line Timer setting after lifting the handset or pressing the SPEAKER button Warm Line Warm line is programmable at PGM 113 All stations are not assigned any Idle Line Selection by default Operation 1 Click Hot Warm Line then you will see the list of Hot Warm line programming If there is no data the table will be empty Hot Warm Line PGM122 iol Refresh Close Station Station Idle Line Assign Type Value 2 Enter a station range then click on Refresh Hot Warm Line PGM122 Ioj xl Refresh Close Station Idle Line Assign Type Value 101 Not Assigned 102 Not Assigned Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 1 40 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 3 Right click under the headings in the blue area then click on the Update Tool but
181. g List 15 50 SIP Pound Usage Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 66 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Attributes PGM160 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Attendant Call RBT MOH MOH MOH The station will present ring back Queuing tone when calling busy attendant station Ringback RBT The station will present MOH hold Tone tone or DVU MOH by system database PGM 171 BTN 2 Camp on RBT MOH MOH MOH is heard in camp on RBT MOH or Ringback tone is heard in camp on CO Line LAST LAST The method of a CO line seizing on CO Choice ROUND Line Groups access DISA Retry 0 9 3 When the DISA user fails to call Station or Counter access a feature then the DISA user can retry another call or feature within the limit of the retry counter If the DISA user cannot access appropriately within this counter the system disconnects the DISA Line automatically ICM CONT CONT _ This field sets whether ICM dial tone is Continuous DISCONT continuous or not Dial Tone CO Dial Tone ON OFF OFF When the speed dial is activated system Detect detects dial tone using CPT instead of pause timer External Night ON OFF OFF When CO lines are marked to UNA Ring ringing will be sent to LBC1 when an incoming call occurs on those lines during night service Hold SYS EXEC SYS System hold or exclusive hold Preference Multi line O
182. gth of CO TELKOM only LONG DISA Answer 1 9 2 DISA DID 1 9 1 Delay Timer Reserved Busy Error ON OFF OFF CPT ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM143 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK COLP Table 00 50 Not To make called party number with Index Assigned assigned COLP Table entry PGM 201 00 49 201 Bin No 50 11 BTN 5 CLIP Table 00 50 Not To make calling party number with Index Assigned assigned CLIP Table entry PGM 201 00 49 PGM 201 Bin No 50 PGM 11 BTN 5 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 2 48 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM143 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Call Type 0 4 2 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Not used 4 Subscriber DID Conv 0 2 0 0 convert digits by DID Dgt Conversion Type PGM230 1 call to the valid extension 2 convert digits by Flex DID Table PGM231 DID Remove 00 99 00 Not Remove received digits from the left of the No Assigned assigned ISDN Enblock ON OFF OFF ON Enblock Sending Mode Send OFF Overlap Sending Mode CLI Transit ORI CFW CFW 1 ORI Send CLI as the originating caller s CLI 2 CFW Send CLI as the call forwarded station s CLI Numbering 0 7 0 F1 Calling NPI F2 Called NPI Plan ID ISDN Call ENABLE DISABLE ISDN call deflection service usage Deflection DISABLE Norway only ISDN DGT RM ON OFF OFF
183. h the VM This mailbox may also be used to record a broadcast message that is delivered to all mailboxes in the system There are no limits on the number of mailboxes that can be marked as administrators e Only 1 mailbox can be active in the administration area at a time Operation Once the System Administrator assigns Admin Rights the user can perform additional mailbox funtions 1 6 for all active mailboxes in the system Add delete a mailbox reset a password record a greeting broadcast message MB name Refresh update Close StationNumber STA Attr I STA Attr II STA Attr III Station Admin 5 1 5 Edit Tool Mond Station _ lt gt ok Edtokandnext _ Cose Select All All Edit OK Admin Disable Y 5 1 5 Announce only Disable v Announce action Previous Outbound notification Disabe Outbound notification CO Group v Outbound notification Tel number Outbound notification retry v Outbound notification interval min JV Cascade destination Cascade type NO cascadi E mail Notification OFF v v Voicemail password max 11 digits v SMTP Server IP v E mail address mas 50 characters SMTP user ID max 24 characters SMTP password mas 24 characters ll Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Mailbox Attributes PGM 127 1 46 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin S
184. hapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Operation A Proxy Server Address can be assigned text data or an IP address The maximum length of this field is 32 characters You must enter the proxy server address if you are usinga proxy server in your SIP application A primary and secondary DNS address can be entered the same as a proxy server address You can enter an IP address or text of up to 32 characters You can also leave these fields empty SIP Attributes Il cRefresh S4uUpdate Close SIP Attributes II Bin No User ID Max 64 Char Authentication User Name 64 Char Authentication User Password Ma Max 64 Char Authentication Passwd Reet 7 Max 64 Char Contact Number o User ID Registeration Register User ID Usage Asc STN NO A User ID Authentication User Name and Authentication User password can be entered as text and numeric data The maximum length of these fields is 64 characters The type of Contact Number should be numeric Otherwise PCADM will display an error message An Authentication user Password Repeat is used to confirm the user password If there is no user password this field should be empty If password exists you should enter the same value in this repeat field Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking Programming 2 129 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Networking Prog
185. he hook switch in order for it to be considered a FLASH Timed Break Recall for SLT SLT Minimum Hook Flash 000 250 020 The minimum bound time that system considers as a Timer 3 digits 10ms hook flash for an SLT SLT Ring Phase Timer 2 5 5 Determines the ring phase of SLTs 1 digit sec 5 SEC 1 SEC ON 4 SEC OFF Station Auto Release 020 300 060 If a station hears ring back tone and no action is taken Timer 3 digits sec this timer is initiated When this timer expires the station is released Unsupervised Conference 00 99 10 Establishes the amount of the time an unsupervised Timer 2 digits min conference can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited the conference Wake up Fail Ring Timer 00 99 20 After a Wake up fail ring invokes on the System 2 digits sec Attendant the alarm ring continues during the length of this timer If this timer expires the Alarm ring will terminate Warm Line Timer 01 20 05 User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing the 2 digits sec SPEAKER button and the warm line timer expires then the idle line selection for warm line is activated Wink Timer 010 200 010 The Time Duration of Seize Acknowledge Signal to DID 3 digits 10ms line Enblock Int Digit Timer 01 20 15 After timer expires Setup is sent 2digits sec CCR Time Out Timer 000 300 010 When this timer expires CCR is activated 3 digits sec DID Inter Digit Timer 01 20 05 This timer is used for
186. ibutes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Supervisor Call Count 00 99 00 If the number of queued calls is more than this call count the supervisor timer will be started UCD Queued Call ON OFF ON Reserved Reserved Max Queue Call Count 00 99 00 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Supervisor Sta Supervisor station number UCD Hunt Stations 0 9 0 UCD group member s priority Priority Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON members will be forwarded UCD DND Ring Timer 000 999 000 If this timer set to 000 sec this timer is not operated If this sec timer is set to 010 after 10 seconds ringing the UCD member is automatically ina UCD DND state UCD Queued Tone ON OFF OFF Ring Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec system announces the greeting if one exists VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 If this timer expires after call come in the group the sec system announces the VMIB if assigned VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This is used to announce greeting when the Location 1 assigned announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This is used to announce when the announce Location 2 assigned 2
187. ic Operation 1 Open File Open the database file from the Load File window An Open Complete message is displayed in the information area gt Message Data is loaded to memory successfully 2 Open Window Click the menu bar button you want to view then select an item Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 9 0 Pre Prgrammed Station Base Program Station List PGM1 10 i Station Attribute PGM111 114 Flex Button Assignment PGMI 15 125 Station COS Assignment PGM1 16 CO Group Access PGM1 17 C Internal Page Zone PGMI 18 Conference Page Zone PGM119 ICM Tenancy Group PGM120 Preset Call Forward PGM121 Hot Warm Line PGM122 CTI Station Attributes PGM123 SMDR Account Group PGMI24 Display station with COS PGM130 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Basic Operation 2 10 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 3 View DB To view information Click the Refresh button The information is displayed Refresh update Cose 4 Update DB To update the DB Current Station Number change an attribute value and Station Attributes PGM111 112 113 1 click the Update button The Attributes I PGM111 112 attributes PGM1 13 Attribute ISI DB is saved Fre fh rl Error Tone for TAD r FlashDrop Loop LCR ACNT Note After clicking the Refresh or Update button the resulting message is displayed in the
188. ic Source 0 9 0 not If music source is assigned calling user will be heard assigned music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone UCD Warning Tone ON OFF ON Establishes whether the ACD supervisor monitors an agent with a warning tone or without a warning tone Alternate Destination Sta No When call comes into the group and there is no Hunt No available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned Supervisor Timer 000 999 030 When the queued time is longer than this timer the sec number of queued lines will be displayed on the supervisor s LCD Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 100 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro UCD Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Supervisor Call Count 00 99 00 If the number of queued calls is more than this call count the supervisor timer will be started UCD Queued Call ON OFF ON Reserved Reserved Max Queue Call Count 00 99 00 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Supervisor Sta Supervisor station number UCD Hunt Stations 0 9 0 UCD group member s priority Priority Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON membe
189. ield is available at connection through the public network 3 Network CNIP Enable ON OFF ON The name of the calling station is sent to the called system between SBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at called party stations display based on the programming 4 Network CONP Enable ON OFF OFF Reserved 5 Network Signal Method FAC UUS FAC Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message 6 Net CAS Enable ON OFF OFF Enable Centralized attendant In master system CAS should be disabled Net VPN Enable ON OFF OFF Enable the VPN function Net CC Retain Mode ON OFF OFF Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Networking Transfer Mode RERT JOIN REROUT Only Transfer by Rerouting is possible 2 TCP Port 0000 9999 9000 TCP port for BLF message 3 UDP Port 0000 9999 9001 UDP port for BLF message 4 BLF Manager IP Address 12 digits 0 0 0 0 IP Address of BLF manager for BLF service 5 Duration of BLF Status 01 20 sec 02 Duration of BLF status message 6 Multicast IP Address 12 digits 0 0 0 0 IP address of Multicast for BLF service 7 Net Trans Fault Recall Timer 001 300 010 Network transfer fault recall timer 8 VOIP Call Reroute CO Group 00 24 00 Used to set the CO group of gatekeeper Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 1 141 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Networking CO Lin
190. ific 1 156 2 138 Networking Attributes PGM 320 PGM321 1 139 2 129 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 1 141 2 131 Networking Programming 1 139 2 129 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 1 143 2 132 Numbering Plan Type PGM 104 105 106 107 109 1 17 2 18 Options Window 2 11 Other Gain Table PGM 412 418 PGM 424 2 140 P Password 1 5 PBX Access Code PGM 172 1 80 2 68 Preferred Line Answer PLA Priority PGM 173 1 81 2 69 Pre Programmed 1 12 2 14 Preset Call Forward PGM 121 1 38 2 35 Print Database 1 165 Print Prot Data PGM 451 1 165 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 1 83 2 70 Procedure for using Offline PC Admin 2 6 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio PGM 176 1 85 2 71 R Remove Software 2 6 RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 1 82 2 69 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 1 152 2 134 RSG IP Phone Port Number Assignment PGM 381 1 150 2 133 RSG IP Phone Programming 1 150 2 133 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 390 392 394 396 2 137 RSG RX Gain Control PGM 396 1 155 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 391 393 395 397 2 137 RSG TX Gain Control PGM 397 1 155 Run Program 2 6 S SIP Attributes 1 amp 2 1 147 2 127 Site Management Tool 1 6 SLIB12 Rx Gain Control PGM 402 2 138 SLIB Rx Gain Control PGM 401 1 156 2 138 Slot Assignment PGM 101 1 14 2 16 SMDR Account Group PGM 124 1 41 2 37 SMDR Attributes PGM 177 1 86 2 71 Speed Editor
191. imited to a maximum length of 5 Local Code Table PGM204 e x Refresh PWClose g l Local Code Max 5 Digits 13414 14132 46245 O0 cC zi Update Tool Bin Local Code Max 5 Digits bh pes M Update Delete Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Incoming Destination Table PGM 237 1 137 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Incoming CLI Destination Table PGM 237 An incoming DID destination can be associated with the incoming CLI If a CLI number is registered and assigned a destination within the Incoming CLI Destination Table all DID calls with this CLI will be routed to the corresponding destination Note This feature is supported only when the CO type is set as DID This feature is executed first when system receives a DID call with CLI Incoming CLI Destination Table PGM237 Refresh Close CLI Max 20 Digits 0 9 Table Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 n 8 9 Update Tool E Bin CLI Max 20 Digits 0 9 Table Index 1 i Delete Close PGM 237 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 CLI Number 001 100 2 Conversion Index Table Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Voice Mailbox COS PGM238 1 138 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Voice Mailbox COS PGM238 The system provides administr
192. in at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Alt if no Member ON OFF OFF If there is no member on duty an ICM call will be dropped or an incoming CO call will be routed to the Attendant Music Source 0 9 0 not If music source is assigned calling user will be heard assigned music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone UCD Warning Tone ON OFF ON Establishes whether the ACD supervisor monitors an agent with a warning tone or without a warning tone Alternate Destination Sta No When a call comes into the group and there is no Hunt No available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned Supervisor Timer 000 999 030 When the queued time is longer than this timer the sec number of queued lines will be displayed on the supervisor s LCD Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 107 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin UCD Group Attr
193. ing Grp ON OFF OFF When DID DISA call destination is STA Service ON ring to Ring Grp to which the station belongs OFF ring to the station Stop Camp On ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE prevents the Camp on Tone from sounding Tone DISABLE Line Length SHORT SHORT Line Length LONG FAR MSG SCRL 0 7 3 Scroll speed when a broadcasting message is displayed SPD Block Back ON OFF OFF To prevent unattended recalling the 1st CO line will be disconnected Call if an SLT seizes a 2nd CO line with FLASH I Time RST ON OFF OFF Internal RST Stn Auth Chk ON OFF OFF Station authentication check Reserved ON OFF OFF Door Open EN DIS EN Door open enable Dummy Sin ON OFF OFF Dummy Station Usage Emergency ON OFF OFF Supervisor Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 27 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attributes PGM113 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Admin ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to program the Admin Database This DISABLE feature is available at only DKTUs STA 100 is Enabled by default VMIB Access ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE allows access to the Digital Voice Unit DISABLE Group ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to use group listening While you are Listening DISABLE talking on handset by pressing the SPEAKER button other persons around you may hear the conversation through the speaker of the ke
194. ing Programming 1 139 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Networking Programming You can program for networking system of the system The programming number range is from 320 to PGM324 Networking Attributes PGM 320 PGM321 Operation 1 Click Networking Attributes 2 Enterthe values of field Most of items are in a combo box and you can only select the item with a mouse or an arrow key 3 Validation of the Edit box field will be checked automatically Q Networking Attributes PGM320 321 lt SRefresh S4uUpdate Close Network Numbering Plan View NET CO Attribute NET Basic Attribute NET Supplementary Attribute Enabled NET Retry Count o s9 NET Transfer Mode REROUT Enabled v TCP Port 000 0 9999 NET CONP Enabled LI UDP Port 001 0 9999 NET Signal Method BLF Manager IP 0 0 0 NET CAS Enabled Duration of BLF status 1 20 sec NET PN Enabled Muliticast IP 0 0 0 NET CC Retain Mode NET TRANS Fault Recall Timer 1 300 sec VOIP Call Reroute CO Group 0 0 24 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking Attributes PGM 320 PGM321 1 140 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Network Enable ON OFF OFF Enable Networking function 2 Network Retry Count 00 99 00 No need at direct connection between SBX IP systems This f
195. ing this menu ISDN Attributes Refresh close ISDN Attributes PGM200 Advice of Charge Do not Service AOC CO ATD Code Max 2 Digits CLI Print To Serial Internal Access Code Max 4 Digits My Area Code Max 6 Digits My Area Prefix Code Max 4 Digits Maintain DIO Name PC Application Station ioo ISDN Attributes PGM 200 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO ATD Max of 2 According to 114 FLEX 5 code digits Extension number can be attached to the CLI COLP message My Area Code Max of 6 Local Area Code digits My Area Prefix Code Max of 4 Prefix Code of Local Area Code digits Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 COLP Table PGM 201 2 104 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro COLP Table PGM 201 After you make an outgoing call through an ISDN line you can see the number you are connected with COLP Table cRefresh S4uUpdate Close COLP Tables Index way 10 IBS mc and Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Tables 2 105 Tables LCR Assignment PGM 220 LCR is a function you can program to select a least cost CO line automatically for Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro day night and any specified time zone The LCR table has four parts In PGM 220 you can program a general database the LCR access mode day zone and time zone Ope
196. ing user will be heard assigned music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone Alternate Destination Sta No When call comes into the group and there is no Hunt No available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned Max Queue Call Count 00 99 99 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON members will be forwarded Queue Count Display ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a Hunt member can check the Queue Count UCD Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received sec for the group the call may continue to wait queue for an available station in the group If queued the call may be sent to a UCD announcement when the queue period exceeds the 1st announcement Timer If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the full first announcement prior to the hunting process guaranteed announcement VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 The second announcement can be provided if the call sec continues to wait beyond the 2nd announcement timer VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not Each Station Hunt Group can be assigned an
197. isplayed for CO incoming calls CO Line Max 12 Name Assign characters Metering Unit 00 06 00 There are 7 metering signal types 0 None 1 50 Hz 2 12 KHz 3 16 KHz 4 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 5 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 6 No Polarity Reverse NPR Line Drop ON OFF OFF If this field set to ON CPT checks the Using CPT incoming CO line when answered and if CPT detects dial tone then the system drops the line for toll restriction CO Distinct 0 4 0 The CO can have a specific ring signal to Ring stations in the system through this field s setting This ring type can be programmed at PGM422 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 56 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Attributes PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line MOH 0 9 1 0 Not assigned by this field 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 Reserved 4 8 SLT MOH 9 HOLD Tone PABX CO Dial YES NO YES YES PX or PABX provides dial tone Tone NO PX or PABX does not provide dial tone System provides dial tone PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Ring Back called party status exists then the system Tone provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that Ring back is provided by PX YES PX NO System PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Erro
198. ke calling party number with Index Assigned assigned CLIP Table entry PGM 201 00 49 PGM 201 Bin No 50 PGM 11 BTN 5 Call Type 0 4 2 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Not used 4 Subscriber Release 3 5 WX vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 58 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM143 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID Conv 0 2 0 0 convert digits by DID Dgt Conversion Type PGM230 1 call to the valid extension 2 convert digits by Flex DID Table PGM 231 DID Remove 00 99 00 Not Remove received digits from the left of the No Assigned assigned ISDN Enblock ON OFF OFF ON Enblock Sending Mode Send OFF Overlap Sending Mode CLI Transit ORI CFW CFW 1 ORI Send CLI as the originating caller s CLI 2 CFW Send CLI as the call forwarded station s CLI Numbering 0 7 0 F1 Calling NPI F2 Called NPI Plan ID ISDN Call ENABLE DISABLE ISDN call deflection service usage Deflection DISABLE Norway only ISDN DGT RM ON OFF OFF ISDN CP ON OFF OFF Inband CLI Type 0 2 0 0 Normal 1 Long CLI 1 PGM114 F21 2 Long CLI 2 PGM114 F22 Reserved ES Screening 0 3 0 User Provided No S User Provided Pass User Provided Fail Network Provided veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147
199. l Page 1 9 Net Number Valid Net A valid net number must be entered Networking programming must be done to use this field 10 Conference 1 9 Room Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Executive Secretary Table 229 2 117 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 There are a number of Executive Secretary pairs available for assignment so that when the executive designated station is in DND state intercom calls and transfers will be automatically routed to the designated secretary station By default Executive Secretary pairs are not assigned The system supports 36 Executive Secretary pairs Operation 4 Executive Secretary Table Refresh Sdupdate Close Executive Secretary Table PGM229 Idx Executive Secretary CO Call To Sec Call Exec If Sec DND Exec Grade 1 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 2 118 Flexible DI D Table PGM 231 This table is for flexible DID table service Operation Flexible DID Conversion Table Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro lt Refresh update Close Flexible DID Conversion Table PGM231 n Table Index 0 d 0 999 Name 11 characters Station fi 11 Day Ring Mode vire Drop Weekend Ring Mode X Reroute Ring Mode
200. l group or Ring group Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 89 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro When assigning a station group to any type of hunt group or voice mail group ring pick up group the system initializes hunt attributes by default value for its own function It can be programmed to meet each customer s individual need scBefresh update Hose Station Group PGM190 Station Group Attributes PGM191 Group Number e20 Group Type Eres Update Pick up Attribute T Circular Terminal Ring UCD Voice Mad Pickup VMIB Announce 1 Timer fis 0 999 sec Overflow Timer fiso 0 600 sec VMIB Announce 2 Timer 0 999 sec Wrap Up Timer 2 999 sec VMIB Announce 1 Location 0 70 No Answer Timer fis 0 99 sec VMIB Announce 2 Location 0 70 Pilot Hunt VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer O 0 999 sec Ak NoMembe VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Music Source Assigned c Akernate destination Station Group 631 N A OFF STA 3632 OFF Overflow srA Max Queued Call Count 59 0 99 Destination 9633 N A OFF C 1 70 3 634 N A OFF C SYS SPD Operation 1 There are two part in window One part is the station group number list and second is the member list and Group Attributes 2 f you select one station group in left field the stations that are a member of the group
201. le Numbering Plan PGM106 107 Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan PGM109 Delete AllNumber From oeete Make Serial Station Numbers Below eoONAU SAWN Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 2 20 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Numbering Plan x RBefresh Supdate close Numbering Plan Type PGM104 NumSetType1 100 399 Numbering Plan PGM105 106 107 Flexible Station Number PGM105 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM106 107 Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan PGM109 Delete All Number From Delete Station Number New Station Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ITEM INTERCOM DEFAULT REMARK RANGE Number Set 1 100 147 Yes As the basic type the 1st digit of the station number should be 1 4 Number Set Type 2 100 147 No The station number can be changed within 799 Number Set Type 3 100 147 No Australia default Number Set Type 4 700 747 No New Zealand default Number Set Type 5 200 247 No Italy default Number Set Type 6 21 68 No Stations above max ports will display as Number Set Type 7 100 147 No Stations above max ports will display as Number Set Type 8 100 147 No The station number can be changed within 999 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Setting 108 2 21 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro
202. llect Digit 1 6 3 Collect DGT digits defines the number of digits expected on a DID line Store Time sec 1 15 15 For DID lines this timer defines the maximum System Base Program delay between incoming DID digits Use the System Base Program to change any system features System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 This area of programming changes system attributes Operation 1 The System Attribute 1 window will display and you can select the Attribute II or Attribute Alarm by clicking the appropriate tab Then you can view the current setting and update each field Refer to the following tables and change the values as desired After editing press the Update button to save the changes Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 2 bb Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Attributes PGM160 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Attendant Call RBT MOH MOH MOH The station will present ring back Queuing tone when calling busy attendant station Ringback RBT The station will present MOH hold Tone tone or DVU MOH by system database PGM 171 BTN 2 Camp on RBT MOH MOH MOH is heard in camp on RBT MOH or Ringback tone is heard in camp on CO Line LAST LAST The method of a CO line seizing on CO Choice ROUND Line Groups access DISA Retry 0 9 3 When the DISA user fails to call Station or Counter access a feature then the DISA user can ret
203. lls are all provided If only Long Distance is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed below are provided Operation 1 Click SMDR Attributes 2 Refer to the following table and change values as desired Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Save Enable Print Enable SMDR Record Call Type Long Distance Records In Detail Print Incoming Call Print Lost Call SMDR Dial Digit Hidden o 0 9 SMDR Currency Unit 3 characters SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse 000000 Must 6 digit SMDR Fraction D 0 5 SMDR Start Timer fo 1 sec 000 250 SMDR Hidden Digit RIGHT 7 02 15 Long Distance Call Digit Counter Long Distance Code Max 2 Digits mo B EE NM M MSN Print On SMDR Print Caller Number ICM SMDR Save ICM SMDR Print SMDR Interface Service I SMDR Connection Type I SMDR Author Index Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Attributes PGM 177 1 87 ITEM SMDR Save Enable RANGE ON OFF Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin SMDR Attributes PGM 177 DEFAULT OFF REMARK The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls ALL or only limit set by timer in Btn12 SMDR Start Timer SMDR Print Enable ON OFF OFF The system can be set to real time print either all outgoing calls ALL or only limit set by timer in Btn12 SMDR Start Timer SMDR Record Call Type
204. load software in the Online PC Admin Package Run the Offline PCAdminPro software Load the downloaded DB File You can view the value of the admin field and change the value if desired If you wish to save the changed value as the DB file select the Save File Menu Upload the saved DB File usr to the MP System with DB Upload Download software NO or P amp Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Detail Program Information 2 7 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Detail Program I nformation Launcher Window amp PCAdminPro Launcher LDK PCAdminPro Launcher Ver C 2Ac 20 Available system contents LDK 100 Office Select the system that you want to use LDK 100 Hotel LDK 300 Office Admin for LDK 300 Office Synem LDK 300 Hotel LDK 300E Office Citing Admin for LDK 300E System LDK 300E Hotel Offline Admin for LDK 300E Hotel Synem ARIA SOHO Offfine Admin for ARTA SCHO Synen File Manager File Manager This shows information about the DB file that exists in the data directory as in the window below DB File List th DB File List Launcher File Manager D Menu usd Rename Canoe Ot Cd Load DB File open CPTO aN Flow Elenco DK PCAdiisPromData Delete Rename Change Dir Change the Directory for DB file management Exit DB File List View You can load the file by double clicking the DB file Release
205. m to change CO Line features The program numbers are from PGM140 TO PGM147 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 PC Admin links various features that are related to each other So you can move to another programming with popup menu Operation Select CO Line List The following window displays CO line basic information PGM140 To check a range enter the range in the index field Or You can press the Refresh button and PC Admin will search and display information for the entire CO range 1 NO OF COLS CO Line List PGM140 141 142 143 lt SRefresh close CONum m CORingAssign COAttrI COAttrII COAtrII COISDNAttr COCIDAttr Normal Normal CO Num Day Msg Night Msg Weekend Msg OnDemand Msg Lunch Msg 1 Mormal 0 Mormal 0 Normal 0 With this window you can select a linked menu by right clicking in the data area of the window and then selecting an option from the popup menu or by clicking on one of the tabs above the data area Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 51 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin If you right click in the data area of the window and then select the Update Tool the following displays CO Line List PGM140 141 142 143 Refresh Close Update Tool CO Num CO Ring Assign CO Attr I CO Ring Assignment PGM144 145 CO Line A
206. me 5 Dgt Auth ON OFF OFF Code Usage vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 1 70 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Attributes 1 PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK LCR Dial Tone ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the SBX IP Detect system first checks if the CO provides dial tone in case an analog CO line is seized for LCR dialing If there is no dial tone the call is rerouted to the Alternate DMT index If the LCR type is set to M13 the LCR dial tone detect option is not applied Transit Out ON OFF OFF Check for Security System Attributes III PGM163 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Alarm Enable ON OFF OFF Alarm Contact CLOSE OPEN CLOSE Type Alarm Mode ALARM ALARM BELL Alarm Signal RPT ONCE RPT Mode Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Admin Password 162 1 71 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Admin Password PGM 162 Password is not assigned by default Operation 1 Click ADMIN Password 2 Enter 4 digits for Admin Password ADMIN Password PGMi62 lel xd Refresh update close Administrator Password Password Confirm Password Valid Digit 0 9 Remove Password Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Attendant Assignment VMIB Announcement Number 164 165 1 72 Chapter
207. mediately CIS and Korea only Transfer Tone RBT MOH RBT Option to provide ring back tone or MOH during transferring CO line CO to CO Xfer ON OFF OFF CPT Detect ACD Package ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ACD Information Usage is printable CO to CO UC ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the conference Timer Extend call user can extend the Unsupervised Conference Timer by dialing the UC TIMER EXTEND Code Call Log List 15 50 15 Number of call log entries Number Reserved Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 2 57 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Attributes Il PGM161 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Network ON OFF OFF If this field is ON the system time date are Time Date Set by the network time date Setting PX Time Day Month Off Hook Ring MUTE BURST MUTE The system off hook ring type can be Type programmed to mute or one burst ring Override 1st ON OFF ON If this field is set to ON and if there is no CO Group available CO line in the 1st CO group the System accesses the next accessible CO group Page Warning ON OFF ON If desired the page warning tone can be Tone suppressed Auto Privacy ON OFF ON The system can be programmed to override a CO line call to gain access to the conversation If privacy is disabled a station privileged to override in PGM 113 Btn 4 joins an existing call in progress Privacy O
208. min SYSTEM Tone Frequency PGM4 Fil Refresh update Close Dial Tone T1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone T1 Ring Back Tone 2 Busy Tone 1 Busy Tone 2 Error Tone T1 Error Tone T2 Dummy Dial Tone T1 Dummy Dial Tone T2 System Tone Frequency PGM 420 LIL 1141 11 LIL ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Dial Tone 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Ring Back Tone 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Busy Tone 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Error Tone 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Dummy Dial Tone 0000 9999 1 T2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 1 160 Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 A user entered frequency may be changed to the closest system frequency available Operation Click Differential Ring Frequency and select the numbers as desired Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Differential Ring Frequency PGM421 Refresh update Close Ring 1 T1 1000 Hz Y Ring 1 T2 1020 Hz X Ring 2 T1 890 Hz Y Ring 2 T2 910 Hz Ring 3 T1 1260 Hz Ring 3 T2 1280 Hz Y Ring 4 T1 800 Hz I Ring 4 T2 820 Hz bel Differential Ring Frequency PGM 421 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring 1 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 2 0000 9999 T1 T2 Na
209. n Admin password is not assigned by default Operation Enter 4 digits for the Admin Password Admin Pass c Refresh SUupdate Close Admin Password PGM162 Admin Password Attendant Assignment PGM 164 A maximum of 5 Attendants can be assigned This includes the Main Attendants and System Attendant The System Attendant is different than a Main Attendant in respect to call handling and system management priority The System Attendant has more priority than a Main Attendant By default the System Attendant is assigned Station 100 and Main Attendants are not assigned Attendant 151 xl Refresh update close Attendant Assignment PGM164 System Attendant Station Number 10 0 Attendant Station Number iz Station Number Station Number 1 Station Number Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Auto Attendant VMIB Annc Assignment PGM165 2 61 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Auto Attendant VMI B Annc Assignment PGM165 AUTO Attendant VMIB ANNC Assignm 81 E3 sSRefresh update Close AUTO Attendant PGM 165 Auto ATD Usage T vmipannc p oo 70 CO to CO COS PGM 166 When auser of a DID DISA TIE line accesses another CO line CO to CO COS is applied The attributes of CO to CO COS are the same as the station COS CO To CO COS cRefresh S4update close CO TO CO COS PGM166 Day COS
210. n Guide June 2010 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 2 18 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Numbering Plan Type PGM 104 105 106 107 109 The default range of station numbers is from 100 147 but 100 131 is the maximum usable at this time You can change the range according to the nation or your style Operation Setting station number sequentially in PGM 105 1 You enter the new station number in the New Staion Number field e Numbering Plan Refresh update Numbering Plan Type PGM104 3 NumSetTypet 100 399 Numbering Plan PGM105 106 107 Flexible Station Number PGMi0S plexibie Numbering Plan PGM106 107 Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan PGMIOS Delete All Number tof Delete Port sation Number New Station Number 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 1 2 4 5 6 5 108 109 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Numbering Plan PGM 104 105 106 107 109 2 19 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro 2 Right click with the mouse Then the menu item Make Serial Station Numbers Below appears 3 Youcan set the station number automatically by selecting this menu item Numbering Plan SBefresh S4update tclose Numbering Plan Type PGM104 NumSetrypeti 100 399 Numbering Plan PGM105 106 107 Flexible Station Number P105 flexib
211. n any internal zone it will not receive any page announcements The SBX IP supports 5 internal page zones Conference Page Zone PGM 119 Each station can be assigned to a conference paging zone You can assign a station in a number of zones or no zone at all The SBX IP system supports 5 conference paging zones Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 2 34 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 You may assign a station to an ICM icum 2 Tenancy Group and restrict ICM v ICM Tenancy Cm Tenancy Groups from calling each cose other Each ICM Tenancy Group ICM Tenancy Group PGM120 can be assigned to a different Group ATD Station Pree Cree attendant The SBX IP system supports 5 ICM Tenancy Groups 1 Enter an attendant station number for the ICM Tenancy Group you have just selected 2 Click each ICM group check box that you want to access 3 After all changes press the Update button to save changes Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Preset Call Forward PGM 121 2 35 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Preset Call Forward PGM 121 If a station does not respond to an outside call for a certain period of time the call may be forwarded to another station Operation Programmed preset call forward pair will be displayed e If there is no pair data the wi
212. n optional Speed Editor If you want to link speed editor to PC Admin select ipLDK Utility gt ipLDK Speed Editor Path to link the program Then you can link the path of which speed editor was installed After assigning the path you just select the menu ipLDK Utility gt ipLDK Speed Editor to run the software If you want to change the path use the ipLDK Utility gt ipLDK Speed Editor Path menu again How to upgrade these utilities Normally only Speed Editor will be released alone If Speed Editor is released for update you just overwrite the old one with the new one Then you can use the updated speed editor without additional configuration The other three utilities will normally be released with PC Admin as a package In special cases each software may be released individually You just copy the new software over the old one Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 1 12 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Pre Programmed The SBX IP system is operated by default values when you first install the system You can change these default values such as Location Information Slot Assignment and Numbering Plan Pre Programmed items are from PGM 100 to PGM 108 Click on the Pre Programmed item in the Menu List to expand the menu and to reprogram the desired function Menu List Search c Pre Programmed Station Base Program CO Line Base Program e Sy
213. n point of the CO per unit pulse SMDR Start Timer 000 250 000 1 sec base SMDR Hidden Digit Right Left Right Hide digits from right or left Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Date Time 178 Not Used 1 88 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin SMDR Attributes PGM 177 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SMDR Long Distance Call 7 15 7 If the SMDR digits are more than this value the system Digit Counter considers it as a long distance call SMDR Long Distance Flex Btn 0 A maximum of 5 SMDR Long Distance codes are Codes 1 5 available The SMDR Long Distance code is 1 or 2 digits number By default the SMDR Long Distance Code is 0 MSN Print On SMDR ON OFF OFF Enable or Disable printing MSN on SMDR Print Caller Number ON OFF OFF Enable or Disable printing of the Caller Number ICM SMDR Save ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is stored in Off line SMDR ICM SMDR Print ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is printed in On line SMDR SMDR Interface Service ON OFF OFF I SMDR Connection Type SIO LAN SIO I SMDR Author Index ON OFF OFF System Date Time 178 Not Used You can set the system date time Operation 1 Click System Date Time System Date Time PGM178 Mije x Refresh update Close System Date 03 31 2010 15 System Time Hour Minu
214. nPro Version Compatibility The Offline PCAdminPro version is not compatible with every MP version Use the Offline PCAdminPro version compatible with your MP Version When you open the user file usr and the user file is an old version you will receive a warning message Also you cannot update the user file and some admin field values may be incorrect Regardless of having an old Offline PCAdminPro version installed you can install a new Offline PCAdminPro version When a new Offline PCAdminPro version is released the directory of the installation path will be adjusted according to the new version For example the path can be Offline PCAdminPro 2 2V for a 2 2 version You can change the path If you do not want to use the old Offline PCAdminPro version delete the old version before installing the new Offline PCAdminPro version Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installation of the Offline PCAdminPro Software 2 3 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Installation of the Offline PCAdminPro Software 1 Insert CD ROM to be installed into the CD ROM Drive of the PC 2 Double click setup exe The Preparing to install progress window will display InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install SBX PCAdminPro Ver 4 044 Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will quide you through the program setup process Please wait Checking Operating System Version If you want to canc
215. ndow will not display anything Preset Call Fi o xi update tidose The Order of Call Forward Chain PGM121 Release 3 5 W 1 SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Hot Warm Line Selection 122 2 36 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 This feature lets a station perform a pre assigned feature as soon as lifting handset or pressing the ON OFF button as if a station selects the feature Hot Line On the other hand Idle Line Selection for a station which is assigned to a warm line is activated when no action takes place for the length of time established for the Warm Line Timer after lifting handset or pressing the ON OFF button Warm Line Warm line is programmable at PGM 113 All stations are not assigned any Idle Line Selection by default Operation You will see the list of Hot Warm line programming If there is no data the table will display nothing ITEM Hot Warm Line TET update Close Hot ot Line PGM122 msc rcm 100 No Selection 101 No Selection 102 No Selection 103 No Selection io No Selection 105 No Selection 106 No Selection 107 No Selection No Selection i109 No Selection 110 No Selection Information for Hot Warn Line Selection RANGE REMARK Flex Btn CO Line CO Group Station 01 48 To activate a feature on a flex button as if pressed 01 12 To seiz
216. ng order User Name Password Level After entering the three items press the SAVE button to save the input Tip for backup and restore of user database To backup the user database save the attribute cds file to your mobile storage device This file is located the installation directory Default C Program files LG Electronics ipLDK PCADM Data To restore the user database save the attribute cds file from your mobile storage device to the installation directory If you want to backup the databases for level and user backup the three files Lmaster cds Ldetail cds Attribute cds Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LDK Utilities 1 11 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin LDK Utilities Description and how to program PC Admin includes some utilities You can download the database of the MPB using one of these utilities Detailed information is described in the user guide This section provides information about connection type Included Utilities e LDK DB Upload Download software LDK Remote Diagnostic software LDK Upgrade software e LDK Speed Editor Path e LDK Speed Editor Other utilities are linked with PC Admin software directly because they have strong relationship with PC Admin So you just select the correct menu to use them Speed Editor has different characteristics Some users do not want to use this utility and other users want to use it So SBX IP PC Admin supports a
217. ns belong Error Tone for ON OFF OFF In Answering machine instead of SLT send Busy Tone Tad SLT Flash ON OFF OFF In SLT pressing FLASH key or hook flashing will drop the CO Call Drop Loop LCR ON OFF OFF Check Account Code at Loop LCR Account Code Except AUS TELSTRA VMIB FIFO LIFO Priority to play VMIB message Message Type LIFO Release 3 5 W vEeRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 25 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attributes PGM111 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Off net Call EN DIS EN The possibility to enable disable Off net call forward Forward Force HF ON OFF OFF Forced Handsfree configuration from V3 Reserved z2 ES Reserved Caller Voice ON OFF OFF Caller Voice Over option ON OFF Over SIP User Bin 00 32 00 UID table index for SIP outgoing call VOIB make From header if this value is 00 Use COLP 01 32 Use SIP UID PGM351 1 Redial DTMF ON OFF ON Station Attributes II PGM112 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Warning ON OFF ON The allowance to receive warning tone to remind of the call elapse Tone time in case of outgoing CO conversation Automatic ON OFF ON While on a CO line the station user seizes another CO line by Hold depressing the button The first CO line goes on Hold automatically STA2 ON CO Call Time ON OFF OFF If this flag is set to YES a station s outg
218. nverted by this value The digits 0 9 can be entered means to ignore received digit and means to bypass the digit The length of DID Digit Mask is 4 e g 1234 is received when DID Digit Mask is set as 8 the digit is converted as 834 R2 Collect 0 Disable Disable If this feature is set to ON 1 2 R2 collect Call 1 Double call is served Answer 2 With Indicator Collect Call 001 250 010 This feature is used when R2 call is Answer Timer answered Brazil only Collect Call 001 250 020 This feature is used when R2 call is Idle Timer answered Brazil only Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 145 1 61 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 145 Each station can be assigned to receive a CO ring for only a certain period of time such as Day Night Weekend Lunch and On demand Operation 1 Select the CO Ring Assignment 2 Select CO Number in CO Num field to read the data 3 To change data right click in the active area click the Update Tool button After changing each destination and delay click the Update button to save changes CO Ring Assignment PGM144 145 Refresh Close CO Num 1 Day Night Weekend Destination Delay Destination fe Destination e Station 100 0 Station 100 Station 100 Update Tool Destination Station 100 Start End conum fi Mode Type St
219. o expand it and then click on a sub menu item to program the specified function Menu List Search Station Base Program e CO Line Base Program e System Base Program Station Group PGM190 191 ISDN System Base Program Tables Hotel 9 7G RSG IP Phone Programming Nation Specific Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Configuration PGM 100 103 2 15 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Configuration PGM 100 103 Configuration lt SRefresh update dose Location Program PGIM100 Nation Code koea Site Name I O Slot Assignment PGM101 Logical Assignment PGM103 All Slot Assignment Logical Assignment SlotNo BoardType Port Number WTIB Port Setting PGM102 Port Number s Location Information PGM 100 PGM 100 allows you to set up the Nation Code and Customer Site Name The Name code is the same as the long distance telephone code The site name is the name of your site This information will be displayed on the menu title bar e LDK 300 Offline Admin 0 7 Pcapp LOK New PCAdminProtfidatatf300 3 056 usr P options Desktop system RETAIN octo Nation eres ECIIICONNN METDTTTUIEANN Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Configuration PGM 100 103 2 16 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro
220. of the CO per unit pulse Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Date Time 178 Not Used 2 73 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro SMDR Attributes PGM 177 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SMDR Start Timer 000 250 000 1 sec base SMDR Hidden Digit Right Right Hide digits from right or left Left SMDR Long Distance Flex Btn 0 A maximum of 5 SMDR Long Distance codes are Codes 1 5 available The SMDR Long Distance code is 1 or 2 digits number By default the SMDR Long Distance Code is O MSN Print On SMDR ON OFF OFF Enable or Disable printing MSN on SMDR Print Caller Number ON OFF OFF Enable or Disable printing of the Caller Number ICM SMDR Save ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is stored in Off line SMDR ICM SMDR Print ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is printed in On line SMDR SMDR Interface Service ON OFF OFF I SMDR Connection Type SIO LAN SIO System Date Time PGM 178 Not Used Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 2 74 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 You can link two stations in a pair The M character indicate that this station is Master station Linked Pairs Linked Pair List PGM179 Master Slave Add Delete All Link Clear 100 M 101 M 102 M 103 M 104 M 105 M 106 M 107 M 108 M
221. oing CO call may be Restriction disconnected when the CO call restriction timer PGM180 Btn 17 expires CO Line ENABLE ENABLE The allowance to access individual CO line by dialing Access DISABLE CO Line ENABLE ENABLE The allowance of queuing for a busy CO group of lines Queuing DISABLE CO PGM ENABLE DISABLE Determines if a station user can program CO button DISABLE Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 26 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attributes II PGM112 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PLA ENABLE ENABLE Theallowance to answer calls by simply lifting handset or pressing the DISABLE SPEAKER button with the answering priority Prepaid Call ON OFF OFF The allowance to use the Prepaid CO Call feature refer to PGM180 Btn16 Speed Dial ENABLE ENABLE Allows access to system speed dial by the station Access DISABLE Two Way ON OFF OFF During incoming or outgoing call user can record the conversation of Record both parties Fax Mode ON OFF OFF In Fax mode Single ring and No Attendant Recall Off net Call EXT ALL ALL ALL Internal Off net Call Fwd and External Off net Call Fwd are Mode allowed EXT only External Off net Call Fwd is allowed UCD Grp ON OFF OFF When DID DISA call destination is STA Service ON ring to UCD Grp to which the station belongs OFF ring to the station R
222. omatically when station mode is set to H P Page Access ON OFF OFF Allows access to paging by the station Ring Type 0 4 0 The station can give its own ring type signal to another station in the system through this field calling party centric Speaker Ring 1 3 1 Station rings through 1 Speaker 2 Headset or 3 Both speaker amp headset Speakerphone ON OFF ON ON allows operation with Speakerphone VMIB Slot 0 2 0 Assign VMIB logical slot the station uses ICM Group 1 5 1 Assign the ICM Tenancy Group to which the stations belong Error Tone for Tad ON OFF OFF In Answering machine instead of SLT send Busy Tone SLT Flash Drop ON OFF OFF In SLT pressing FLASH key or hook flashing will drop the CO Call LoopLCR Account ON OFF OFF Check Account Code at Loop LCR Code Except AUS TELSTRA VMIB Message FIFO LIFO Priority to play VMIB message Type LIFO Off net Call EN DIS EN The possibility to enable disable Off net call forward Forward Force HF ON OFF OFF Forced Handsfree configuration from V3 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 26 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Station Attributes PGM111 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Reserved Reserved B Caller Voice Over ON OFF OFF Caller Voice Over option ON OFF SIP User Bin 00 32 00 UID table index for SIP outgoing call VOIB make From header if this value is 00 Use COLP 01
223. on 1 1 2 1 H Hardware Software Requirements 1 1 2 1 Hot Desk Attribute PGM 250 1 49 2 41 Hot Warm Line Selection PGM 122 1 39 2 36 l ICM Tenancy Group PGM 120 2 34 Initialization DB Init 1 163 In Room Indication PGM 183 1 96 2 82 Installation of the Offline PC Admin Software 2 3 Installation of the Online PC Admin Software 1 3 Internal Page Zone Access PGM 118 1 36 2 33 Introduction to Offline PC Admin 2 1 Introduction to Online PC Admin 1 1 IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 1 153 2 135 IP Setting PGM 108 1 19 2 21 ISDN Attributes PGM 200 1 110 2 103 ISDN System Base Program 1 110 2 103 L LCD Date Time Language Display Mode PGM 169 1 76 2 65 LCR Assignment PGM 220 1 112 2 105 LCR DMT Table PGM 222 1 116 2 108 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table Table PGM 221 1 114 2 107 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 1 118 2 109 LDK Utilities 1 11 Level Management Administrator Only 1 8 Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 1 89 2 74 Local Code Table PGM 204 1 136 2 125 Location Information PGM 100 1 12 2 15 Logical Slot Assignment PGM 103 1 15 2 16 Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 1 135 2 124 Modem PGM 170 1 76 2 65 MODU Rx Gain Control PGM 411 1 157 2 138 Release 3 5 WX vERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Index IND iii Music PGM 171 1 77 2 66 N Nation Code and Site Name 1 7 Nation Spec
224. or the group the call may continue to wait queue for an available station in the group If queued the call may be sent to a UCD announcement when the queue period exceeds the 1st announcement Timer If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the full first announcement prior to the hunting process guaranteed announcement VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 The second announcement can be provided if the call sec continues to wait beyond the 2nd announcement timer VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not Each Station Hunt Group can be assigned an Location 1 assigned announcement which is played when the call is first received The announcement may be assigned as VMIB Release 3 5 W verTicar SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 1 106 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin UCD Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This location is used to announce greeting when the Location 2 assigned VMIB Announce 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires Timer sec 000 not assigned VMIB Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will rema
225. p 00 24 00 means an internal net station number 4 CPN or IP Information 16 digits for ISDN IP address for VoIP A max of 4 VOIB IP addresses can be programmed 5 Alternate Dial Bin 2000 2499 Alternate Dial Number System Speed Bin that the system uses when the networking path has a fatal problem 6 Destination MPB IP IP Address IP Address of destination system to support DECT mobility service 7 Digit Repeat Yes No No If this PSTN number is not connected with a PSTN line directly but connected by another networking system set Digit Repeat to YES 8 CO Add Code CLI On Off Off Use CO Attendant Code for CLI or use NET CLI Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG IP Phone Programming 2 133 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro RSG I P Phone Programming VOI B Slot Assignment for RSG I P Phone PGM 380 RSG I P Phone Port Number Assignment 381 The RSG IP Phone receives call service through VOIB VOIB Port Assignment For RSG IP Ph Ea Then the VOIB for RSG IP can be Refresh ijUpdate Close assigned Assignment for RSG IP Phone PGM380 If several boards are assigned please assign the first VOIB slot on STA COL Installed VoiB Slot NO Board in PGM 103 gt Up Down Select VoiB Slot Channel 0 8 RSG IP Phone Port Setting PGM381 eRSG Number 8 0 8 Phone Number
226. r Tone called party status exists then the system provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that error tone is provided by PX YES PX NO System PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Busy Tone called party status exists then the system provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that busy tone is provided by PX YES PX NO System PABX CO YES NO NO If R2 PX which does not give us tone for Announce called party status exists then the system Tone provides tone according to cause value This field is only when Cause means that announcement is provided by PX but the system provides only error tone YES PX NO System CO Flash 000 300 005 10 msec base Timer WV veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 57 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Line Attributes PGM142 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Open Loop 00 20 00 100 msec base Detect Timer Line Length SHORT SHORT Line Length of CO TELKOM only LONG DISA Answer 1 9 2 Timer DISA DID 1 9 1 Delay Timer Reserved Busy Error ON OFF OFF CPT ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM143 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK COLP Table 00 50 Not To make called party number with Index Assigned assigned COLP Table entry PGM 201 00 49 PGM 201 Bin No 50 PGM 11 BTN 5 CLIP Table 00 50 Not To ma
227. r is to secure time interval between incoming 3 digits 100 ringing signals so that the active ringing can be continued in the system until this timer expires CO Ring On Timer 1 9 2 The CO Ring On Timer controls the time necessary to 1 digit 100ms detect an outside line as ringing into the system CO Warning Tone Timer 060 900 180 Establishes the amount of time before receiving warning 3 digits sec tone to remind of the call elapsed time in case of outgoing CO conversations VM Outbound Retry 0 9 2 Counter 1 digit Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 79 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Timers Il PGM 181 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Call Forward No Answer 000 255 015 The Call forward busy no answer feature will take place Timer 3 digits sec using this timer If this timer has a non zero value and an extension is set to busy no answer forward by the station user then the extension will ring for this timer and will then forward to the next destination DID DISA No Answer 00 99 25 A DID call will be forwarded to the Attendant if the station Timer 2 digits sec is busy or does not answer within this time VMIB User Record Timer 010 255 020 The time duration of the VMIB user greeting 3 digits sec VMIB Valid User Message 0 9 4 The time duration of a valid VMIB user message Timer 1 digit sec Door Open Timer 05 99 20 Thi
228. r later ALAN Port must be installed on the MPB for the LAN connection Aunique IP Address must be assigned for the LAN connection PC e Pentium Celeron 233MHz CPU or Higher CPU e 256 color Super VGA 800 600 or higher e Network Interface Card for the LAN connection e 2 button Mouse e 32MB RAM minimum e MS Windows 98 ME 2000 XP Vista Enough hard drive space for installation Cable If a NIC is used for a LAN connection UTP cable will be needed with an RJ 45 jack between the PC and the SBX IP system Hardware Configuration To use a LAN connection between a PC and the SBX IP system the PC and the SBX IP system should be connected to the local network Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Installing amp Unstalling Software 3 2 Chapter 3 Speed Editor Installing amp Unstalling Software Once the hardware is installed you are ready to install the software To Install the Speed Editor program Microsoft Windows must be installed on your computer before you install the Speed Editor program For information on installing Windows refer to the appropriate user s manual To Uninstall the Speed Editor program Click Uninstall Speed Editor or you can also select Speed Editor in Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel Full Screen Layout Full Screen Layout LDK Spd Editor File Connection File Transfer Help Dci CO Line CO Number Phone Number 2
229. ramming You can program for networking SBX IP systems The programming number range is from PGM 320 to PGM 324 Networking Attributes PGM EXXNSE ET S20 Pond peseum 5dupdate Close NET Basic Attribute PGM320 NET Enabled Retry Count 0 99 NET Enabled COMP Enabled Signal Method Fac m NET CAS Enabled NET VPN Enabled NET Retain M Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Network Enable ON OFF OFF Enable Networking function 2 Network Retry Count 00 99 00 No need at direct connection between SBX IP systems This field is available at connection through the public network 3 Network CNIP Enable ON OFF ON The name of the calling station is sent to the called system between SBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at called party stations display based on the programming 4 Network CONP Enable ON OFF OFF Reserved 5 Network Signal Method FAC UUS FAC Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking Attributes 320 PGM321 2 130 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 Net CAS Enable ON OFF OFF Enable Centralized attendant In master system CAS should be disabled 7 Net VPN Enable ON OFF OFF Enable the
230. range then click on the View button 3 For day and night you select a station COS and press the Refresh button You can see the COS information that you have selected Display station COS PGM116 130 T P xj Refresh Close COS Type Level Station Range 101 View Station Number Station Day COS Might COS 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station COS PGM 116 1 34 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin 4 To update the COS level right click in the window and click on the Update Tool button The following Update Tool displays where you can change values With this tool you can edit one station or a range of stations Display station COS PGM116 130 oj xj Refresh Close COS Type Level Station Range 101 Station Number Station Day COS Night COS Update Tool 1 Station Day COS Night COS m Update Start End B Day COS Night COS me n Update Close 5 After entering the values press the Update button to save the changes Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Group Access Station 117 1 35 CO Group Access Station PGM 117 You can divide the CO lines by group and give a station access to a specified CO line group All stations can access any
231. ration 1 Select an LCR Access Mode 2 Duplicated day can t be assigned for different day zones 3 Foreach day zone you set up time of day The time also can t be duplicated for each day zone Least Cost Routing Control Attributes scRefresh Sdupdate close LGR Access Mode M00 Disable LCR Least Cost Routing Control Attribute PGM220 Monday zone 1 Friday Zone 1 v v Tuesday 1 Saturday one 1 Day Zone Wednesday Zone 1 Sunday Thursday Zone 1 Zone 1 B Time of Day Zone 1 p 4 0 23 0 24 Time Zone 1 Time of Day Zone 2 0 23 0 24 Time of Day Zone 3 0 23 0 24 Time of Day Zone 1 p p 0 23 0 24 Time Zone 2 Time of Day Zone 2 0 23 0 24 Time of Day Zone 3 0 23 0 24 Time of Day Zone 1 NN p 0 23 0 24 Time Zone 3 Time of Day Zone 2 0 23 0 24 Time of Day Zone 3 0 23 0 24 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 LCR Assignment 220 2 106 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro LCR Table PGM 220 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK LCR Access Moo Disable LCR Access Mode 00 M00 Disable LCR M01 M00 LCR Access Mode01 M01 only Loop LCR M02 LCR Access Mode02 M02 Internal and Loop LCR M11 LCR Access Mode11 M11 Loop and Direct CO LCR M12 LCR Access Mode
232. rded or only long distance calls exceeding the time limit set by SMDR Start Tmr The long distance calls are identified by SMDR long distance code programming Btn 15 SMDR Long Distance Call 07 15 07 If the SMDR digits are more than this value the system Digit Counter considers it as a long distance call Print Incoming Call ON OFF OFF If this option PIC is set to ENABLE all incoming calls are printed with either all outgoing calls or long distance calls Print Lost Call ON OFF OFF If this option PLC is set to ENABLE all lost calls are printed whether unanswered or not Records in Detail ON OFF ON Due to limited system memory size in places where many calls take place the SMDR record buffer can easily become saturated So if the customer doesn t need the detailed call information but total call total metering count and total cost for individual station then it is possible to save only the total accumulation rather than the detailed records in their entirety SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0 9 0 According to this value the symbol will be hidden in the SMDR digits SMDR Currency Unit 3 Char For easy identification of call cost the currency unit can be input with 3 alphabetic characters to be printed in front of the call charge amount SMDR Cost Per Unit 6 digits This is the call cost unit per cost metering pulse which is Pulse sent from the Central Office SMDR Fraction 0 5 0 This value represents the decimal position point
233. rent values will be displayed 3 Select or enter each field and press the Update button to save data This menu was linked in other CO programming field ITEM CID Mode Select CID Name Display RANGE OFF FSK DTMF NAME TEL CO CIDU Attribute PGM147 DEFAULT FSK TEL REMARK Analog CO line CLI carries the caller s telephone number and name According to this ADMIN program value LCD displayed data can be selected If this value is set to NAME the caller s name and telephone number will display on the LCD If this value is set to TELEPHONE NUMBER the caller s telephone number will displayed on the LCD Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 2 b3 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro T1 CO Line Attributes PGM 152 Use this feature to set North American T1 standards that require the T1 terminating device in this case the SBX IP system include various adjustable timers and counters Upon entry into PGM 152 use the dialpad to enter the desired CO line range T1 CO Line Attribute PGM152 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Pause Duration 1 9 2 A timed pause may be included in a Speed Dial number in which case the pause time is defined by this entry Release Guard Time 100ms 1 60 20 The RIs Grd Guard timer defines the length of time the system will maintain a Line as busy after the call has been terminated to assure the PSTN has suffici
234. right side of the tree as you click on an item Each upper item is implemented on a dialog box that has tabs to classify the lower items Password As you execute the SBX IP PC Admin application you will see the box below to enter a user ID and password An Administrator must assign the user ID access level and password for each user This password is not related to PGM162 This is a multi level management for users and it is only for use with PC Admin Default ID administrator Password 0000 Operation When you launch PC Admin software a logon dialog box will display You Login Dialog must enter your user ID and password An Administrator has the highest PC ADMIN priority and level Only an Administrator can program the user ID GSVAD C 5Ac 2009 11 30 and password 1 Enter your user name and Copyright C 2005 2009 password whenever you want LG Nortel Co Ltd S BX I P to logon But if you use the All rights reserved same ID you can enable the User ID Save field Then you Enter user ID and Password do not need to enter your user OK name again If another user wants to logon they should Cancel enter their own user ID 2 Press the OK button after User ID Save entering your user ID and password 3 Follow the instructions in Connection Type Setup which is described in the next section Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Connection Type 1 6 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online
235. roup stations and allow an idle station in a group to respond to a call Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 Stations in the system can be grouped so that incoming calls will search hunt for an idle station in the group Three hunting processes can be assigned Circular Terminal or UCD Uniform Call Distribution Each of the system s groups is assigned as a function Call Pick Up Group and or Hunt Group Voice Mail Group and Ring Group The available groups per system and stations per group is as follows Number of Groups per system 10 e Stations per group 26 A station can belong to any number of Pickup groups but can only belong to one Station Hunt group Voice mail group or Ring group When assigning a station group to any type of hunt group or voice mail group ring pick up group the system initializes hunt attributes by default value for it s own function It can be programmed to meet each customer s individual need Operation 1 Click Station Group 2 Select a group 3 Press the Update button will be displayed by right clicking with the mouse to add or modify members There are two parts in the window One part is the assigned group number list and the second is for member configuration If you select one station group in the left field the station that is a member of the group will be displayed automatically If you want to add or edit the station group select the Update Tool button in popup menu
236. rs will be forwarded UCD DND Ring Timer 000 999 000 If this timer set to 000 sec this timer is not operated If this sec timer is set to 010 after 10 seconds ringing the UCD member is automatically in UCD DND state UCD Queued Tone ON OFF OFF Ring Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK VMIB Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec system announces the greeting if one exists VMIB Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 If this timer expires after call come in the group the sec system announces the VMIB if assigned VMIB Announce 00 70 00 not This is used to announce greeting when the Location 1 assigned announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 70 00 This is used to announce when the announce Location 2 assigned 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 000 999 000 The VMIB announce 2 is repeated when this timer expires Timer sec 000 not assigned Announce 2 Repeat ON OFF OFF This is used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 101 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Ring Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the gro
237. ry another call or feature within the limit of the retry counter If the DISA user cannot access appropriately within this counter the system disconnects the DISA Line automatically ICM CONT CONT This field sets whether ICM dial tone is Continuous DISCONT continuous or not Dial Tone CO Dial Tone ON OFF OFF When the speed dial is activated system Detect detects dial tone using CPT instead of pause timer External Night ON OFF OFF When CO lines are marked to UNA Ring ringing will be sent to LBC1 when an incoming call occurs on those lines during night service Hold SYS EXEC SYS System hold or exclusive hold Preference Multi line ON OFF ON The system allows a conference with Conference multi CO lines Print LCR ON OFF ON Print dialed digits or LCR conversed digits Conv Dgt in LCD vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Attributes PGM 160 161 163 2 56 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro System Attributes I PGM160 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Conference ON OFF ON When entering a conference members Warning Tone will receive a warning tone Off net ON OFF ON In case of Off net call forward Off net Prompt Usage prompt will be heard It only applies to CO to CO Transfer Off net DTMF ON OFF ON In case of Offnet call forward DTMF Tone Tone will be heard It only applies to CO to CO Transfer CO Voice IMM DGT DGT Option to connect voice path after seizing Path Connect CO line Im
238. s after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Put Mail Index 1 4 1 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables Get Mail Index 1 4 2 This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables Hunt Type CIRC TERM 1 Circular Hunt Group TERM 0 Terminal Hunt Group SMDI Port Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Pick Up Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Auto Pickup ON OFF OFF If a hunt member is ringing another hunt member pickup automatically by pressing the SPEAKER button or by going off hook All Ring ON OFF OFF When a hunt member that is in TONE mode is ringing all the other stations are ringing also The Auto Pickup feature must be set before All Ring is set Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ISDN System Base Program 2 103 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro ISDN System Base Program To change the ISDN related features use PGM 200 PGM 201 ISDN Attributes PGM 200 You can change the general ISDN attributes us
239. s and Ldetail cds which are in the installation directory If you backup these two files it will be very helpful for emergency use 1 Install the PC Admin software in your PC and configure the level menu with a desired level 2 Backup the Lmaster cds and Ldetail cds files Default C Program files LG Electronics ipLDK PCADM Data to your mobile storage device e g floppy diskette USB memory CD ROM etc 3 Goto another site and install the PC Admin package 4 After installation copy your preprogrammed DB file from your mobile storage device Lmaster cds and Ldetail cds to the installation directory Default C Program files LG Electronics ipLDK PCADM Data These two files will be overwritten and you can use the PC Admin with the fixed level information that you have programmed Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 User Management Administrator Only 1 10 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin User Management Administrator Only Description and how to program PC Admin supports multiple users with different levels When you want to add or modify the user information refer to below description 1 Click on Tools User Management The following window for level management displays User Management C3 Mew save Close __ Password administrator tsmith 2 Press the New button to add a user A dialog box will display with fields in the followi
240. s assigned as default The CO line Modem Associate Device PGM170 isn t assigned any default value Operation STA poo The range for stations is 100 131 and CO Line range is 1 12 Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Music PGM 171 2 66 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Music PGM 171 You may assign BGM Background Music MOH Music On Hold and ICM Box Doorbox Music Channel MOH is the music a caller can hear while waiting for his call to be picked up again Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Music PGM 171 2 67 Operation 1 Click Music 2 Refer to the table below and set the values Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK BGM Type 0 8 01 00 No BGN 01 Internal Music 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 MOH Type 0 9 01 00 Not Assigned 01 Internal Music 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 09 Hold Tone ICM Box Music 0 8 01 00 No BGN 01 Internal Music Channel 02 External Music 03 Reserved 04 SLT 1 05 SLT 2 06 SLT 3 07 SLT 4 08 SLT 5 Assign SLT Flex 1 5 SLT MOH 1 5 MOH SLT STA No Dial Tone 0 5 0 N A To assign external dial tone set the SLT Source station number of the SLT port ICM Ring Back 0 5 0 N A To assign external ICM tone set the SLT Tone sta
241. s station and the other is ICM Group 3 After entering the data press the Update button to save the data Flex Button Assignment PGM115 125 Mi ess DSS Button PGM125 10 xj Refresh close Close Current Station Copy To DSS PGM125 From Station 101 Flex Button Type Value 1 STA BTN Individual Defined Key 2 STA PGM BTN Individual Defined Key To Station s xx Button 1 4 xx Button 2 Destination Number 102 E xx Button 3 6 xx Button 4 Update 7 LOOP If the ICM group member is too many you wait 8 Grp 1 on more 3 minutes you can t work the other 9 Not Assigned v PGM Station IP List for CTI PGM 126 You can make a CTI connection with a LAN connection To use this feature you must enter the IP address of the PC that you want to use CTI with For example if you use station 101 and its IP address is 10 0 0 5 then you should enter this table with station 101 and IP Address of 10 0 0 5 You can enter this mapped table up to the max station numbers of the SBX IP system The limitation depends on the lock key that is installed on the SBX IP system Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Mailbox Attributes 127 1 45 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Mailbox Attributes 127 You can provide a mailbox with administrative options to perform common tasks associated wit
242. s timer establishes the length of time that is needed to 2 digits 100ms activate a door open relay ICM Box Timer 00 60 30 Establishes the amount of time programmed stations will Doorbox 2 digits sec ring when the ICM box user presses the CALL button ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 20 10 If action is not taken within ICM dial tone timer the user 2 digits sec will receive an error tone Inter Digit Timer 01 20 05 If the time between dialed digits exceeds the Inter digit 2 digits sec timer the user will receive an error tone MSG Wait Reminder Tone 00 60 00 Establishes the amount of time between repeated Timer 2 digits min reminder tones to a key telephone with a message waiting Paging Timeout Timer 000 255 015 Establishes the maximum time allowed for a page The 3 digits sec System will automatically disconnect the page at the end of this time unless the caller has hung up earlier Pause Timer 1 9 3 Establishes the length of the pause for use with 1 digit sec automatically sent digits or other speed dialing Preset Call Forward Timer 00 99 10 Establishes the amount of time an outside line call will ring 2 digits sec before being forwarded to a predetermined station This entry works with Preset Forward Assignments in station attributes More than one station can be forwarded to the same destination Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill PGM 180 181 182 2 80
243. se 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 324 1 144 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 System Usage NET PSTN NET 2 Net Numbering Code 16 digits means any digits can be inserted between 0 9 The digits followed by is an internal station number 3 Net Number CO Group 00 24 00 means an internal net station number 4 CPN or IP Information 16 digits CPN for ISDN IP address for VoIP A max of 4 VOIB IP addresses can be programmed 5 Alternate Dial Bin 2000 2499 Alternate Dial Number System Speed Bin that the system uses when the networking path has a fatal problem 6 Destination MPB IP IP Address IP Address of destination system to support DECT mobility service 7 Digit Repeat Yes No No If this PSTN number is not connected with a PSTN line directly but connected by another networking system set Digit Repeat to YES 8 CO Atd Code CLI On Off Off Use CO Attendant Code for CLI or use NET CLI Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 VolB Programming 1 145 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Vol B Programming Vol B Programming PGM 340 You can program the VoIB configuration with PC Admin If you use another application you may have problems We recommend that you check the version of the MPB and the PC Admin Operation
244. ser Record Timer 010 255 020 The time duration of the VMIB user greeting 3 digits sec VMIB Valid User Message 0 9 4 The time duration of a valid VMIB user message Timer 1 digit sec Door Open Timer 05 99 20 This timer establishes the length of time that is needed to 2 digits 100ms activate a door open relay ICM Box Timer 00 60 30 Establishes the amount of time programmed stations will Doorbox 2 digits sec ring when the ICM box user presses the CALL button ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 20 10 If action is not taken within ICM dial tone timer the user 2 digits sec will receive an error tone Inter Digit Timer 01 20 05 If the time between dialed digits exceeds the Inter digit 2 digits sec timer the user will receive an error tone MSG Wait Reminder Tone 00 60 00 Establishes the amount of time between repeated Timer 2 digits min reminder tones to a key telephone with a message waiting Paging Timeout Timer 000 255 015 Establishes the maximum time allowed for a page The 3 digits sec System will automatically disconnect the page at the end of this time unless the caller has hung up earlier Pause Timer 1 9 3 Establishes the length of the pause for use with 1 digit sec automatically sent digits or other speed dialing Preset Call Forward Timer 00 99 10 Establishes the amount of time an outside line call will ring 2 digits sec before being forwarded to a predetermined station This entry works with Preset
245. splay Mode Mode 12 Hour Mode 2 LCD Time Mode 12 Hour Mode or 24 Hour Mode LCD Date Display Mode 3 LCD Date Mode DD MM YY MM DD YY or DD MM Y Y 4 LCD Language Select Language Display Mode which language English Modem PGM 170 It must be specified which station or CO 15 xl line is connected to the modem The Refresh update Close last station is assigned by default and the CO line isn t assigned any default value Modem Associated Device Operation 1 Click Modem 2 The range for station is C CO Number 100 131 Default value is last station number e Station Number 147 Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Music PGM 171 1 77 Music PGM 171 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin You can assign BGM Background Music MOH Music On Hold and ICM Box Music Channel MOH is the music a caller can hear while waiting for his call to be picked up again 2 0 x Refresh 5dupdate Close Assign SLT MOH 1 5 INT MUSIC MOH Type INT MUSIC ICM Box Music Channel NO BGM SLT MOH 1 STA Number SLT MOH 2 STA Number SLT MOH 3 STA Number SLT MOH 5 STA Number Ld SLTMOH4STANUmber Dial Tone SRC Not Assign Y ICM Ring Back Tone Src Assign CO Ring Back Tone 5 uot Assign 8 Poly MOH Romance Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Music PGM 171 1
246. splayed From index 1 to maximum station number Day Night COS will be displayed and you cannot change them But the other range of index you can change the COS If you want to change the COS for a station number you should program PGM 116 Release 3 5 WV vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 1 124 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Authorization Code Table PGM227 Refresh Close Index Value 3 11 Digits Day COS Night CO 1 1 12312341235 4152351 oon C QIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 _ Update Tool Update Delete and Next Index Value 3711 Digits 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Day COS Night COS Update Delete Close Release 3 5 veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 1 125 Customer Call Routing PGM 228 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin According to voice guidance an outside caller may be connected to a certain destination and to hear another voice message by pressing a button on their keyset Operation 1 Click Customer Call Routing 2 Select a CCR table number 01 70 and press the Refresh button You will see 10 entry indexes in the CCR Table Customer Call Routing PGM228 I fri Refresh S4uUpdate Close Index 6 m 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination
247. station By default Executive Secretary Pairs are not assigned Operation Choose an index and click Update Tool of pop menu Q Executive Secretary Table PGM229 Refresh Close Index Executive Secretary CO Call To Sec Call Exec if Sec DNC Exec Grade ICM Call t 1 OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Update Tool Index Executive Secretary CO Call To Sec Call Exec if Sec DND Exec Grade ICM Call to Si n WT JW Jw more CT m Update Delete Close Conditions e CO Call To Sec This directs CO calls to the secretary Call Exec if Sec DND If this field is enabled and the secretary is in a DND state the call will be delivered to the executive e Grade This field can be used to assign the level of the secretary Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 1 128 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Flexible DI D Table PGM 231 This table is for flexible DID table service Operation 1 Click Flexible DID Table 2 You can select the range that you want to read You might have a problem because of a long read operation with a slow connection At that time if you uses a Modem and serial connection it takes a lot of time to read all of the data because of a more stable data exchange There is an editable field and limit number is 50 So you can select a special range and can save waiting time
248. stem Base Program Station Group e ISDM System Base Program Tables Network volB GatekKeeper RSG IP PHONE Programming Nation Specific Initialization DB Init Print DataBase Ce Supplementary Service ogogcogogn BEI BIER IRIS EIE Location nformation 100 Set up the Nation Code and Customer Site Name code is the same as long distance telephone code The site name is the name of your site This information will be displayed on the menu title bar automatically when you connected to the SBX IP system SBX IP PCADMIN Tools Option Utilities Help SYSTEM SBX IP 320 OFFICE MPB GS78P B 0Aa MAY 08 Nation America Site Name Vertical Connect E TxE PCADM Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Location Information PGM 100 1 13 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Operation 1 Click Location Information Q Location Information PGM100 Refresh update Close Nation America v Site Name Type None ANNC bpo USA is the default value of Nation Code You can change the code Before changing the Nation Code check the DB Protected by DIP4 If DB Protected is enabled nation code will not be changed 4 After changing the Nation Code you have to reset the system At that time Dip S W 8 should be located
249. t be allowed dependant on MPB validation Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Flex Buttons Assignment PGM 115 1 32 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Auto Increment and Auto Copy are exclusive You can select only one at one time Information for Flex Button Assignment NO TYPE RANGE REMARK 1 User Button User can program by button programming procedure 2 CO xx Button 01 12 CO Line 3 CO Grp xx 01 24 CO Group 4 LOOP Loop Button 5 STA xxxx 100 131 Station Number 6 STA PGM Button 11 99 7 STA SPD xx 00 99 Station Speed Bin 8 SYS SPD xxxx 2000 2499 System Speed Bin 9 Num Plan Button Num Plan Code 10 Net DSS Button Net DSS number When using the Networking checked by MPB feature 11 Reserved ad Release 3 5 A veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station COS PGM 116 1 33 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station COS PGM 116 You can change the COS Class of Service for each station COS is from COS 1 to COS 7 All station COS for day and night operation is COS 1 by default For a particular call the CO COS is combined with station COS to determine the restriction Each station must be assigned a class of service which governs the station s toll restriction for the day and night operation The weekend COS is same as night COS Operation 1 Click Display Station COS 2 Enter a station
250. tation Mailbox Attibutes PGM127 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT Admin Disable Enable Disable COS 1 5 1 5 1 Announce only Disable Enable Disable Announce action Hang up Previous Previous Outbound Notification Disable Enable Disable Outbound Notification CO Group 1 24 1 Outbound Notification Tel number 24 digits none Outbound Notification retry 1 9 2 Outbound Notification interval 1 60 minutes 3 Cascade destination Station Virtual MB none Cascade type NO cascading Imediately NO cascading When noti fails Urgent E mail Notification Off On Off Voicemail password max 11 digits none SMTP Server IP EX XXX XXX XXX XXX none E mail address max 50 characters none SMTP user ID max 24 characters none SMTP password max 24 characters none Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 1 47 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Virtual Mailbox Attributes PGM 129 A virtual mailbox is simply a voice mailbox that does not have a digital IP SLT extension associated with it By default extensions 200 249 are the default virtual mailboxes S lt SRefresh update Close irtual mailbox range MSG type Edit Tool VM BOX lt gt Edit OK Edit OK and Next Close SelectAll V All Edit OK v Admin Disable VMIB access Disable M 05 1 5 fi v Announce only Dis
251. te DST Usage 2 Set the values and click the Update Button The changed values will display on the LCD screen of your keyset instantly Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 1 89 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Linked Station Pairs Table PGM 179 You can link two stations as a pair and it is possible to make up to 24 pairs in the system Operation 1 Select the Update Tool to add or delete a station pair Enter a station number to be linked with or deleted 2 Todelete a pair erase the slave area or press the Delete button After changing data press the Update button to save changes PEE n Station Pairs Table PGM 8 Ea Refresh Close Master Slave 100 102 101 103 Update Tool Master ho Delete Slave fi 02 Close Release 3 5 W 1 SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 System Timers Ill 180 181 182 1 90 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers I 111 180 181 182 You can set the system timers You can change the interval of time that each event occurs System Timers PGM180 182 rm Refresh Close Operation D Timer Range Value 1 Click System Attendant Recall Timer 0 60 1min 1 Timers s Call Park Recall Timer 0 600 1sec 120 2 Select an item to Camp on Recall Timer 0 200 1sec 30 be altered and 4 Exclusive Hold Re
252. the DID type 2 feature In DID type 2 digits sec 2 the SBX IP system will wait for new DID digits to be received until this timer expires or the call routing of DID type 2 is executed Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 In Room Indication PGM 183 1 96 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin System Timers Ill PGM 182 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK FAX Tone Detect Timer 01 10 05 Establishes the time allowed for a FAX tone to be 2 digits sec detected before disconnection FAX CO Call Timer 1 5 1 Establishes the time allowed for a FAX call before 1 digit min disconnection In Room I ndication PGM 183 This window assigns Room Indication data This window consists of a supervisor and various members A Supervisor cannot be assigned as a normal member If a supervisor and a member are duplicated the PC Admin will display warning window When user leaves the supervisor field it means that the user wants to delete the data So PC Admin will delete data with the selected bin number In Room Indication PGM183 x Refresh Close Supervisor 100 Update Tool index n Index Supervisor 103 v 00 oon Oc X CO as Update Delete Close vl Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Chime Bell Attribute PGM 184 1 97 Chapter 1 SBX IP
253. time HH MM Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 Voice Mail Dialing Table Apply this feature to use xc Refresh close voice mail and signal Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM234 assignment between two Max 12 Digits Include P D F Systems Comment pp Pause Flash It is recommended that you Index Prefix Suffix leave the settings at their default values Voice Mail 1 Put Voice Mail 2 Get Operation Voice Mail 4 Voice Mail 5 No Answer Voice Mail amp Error Voice Mail 7 Busy Voice Mail S DND Voice Mail 9 Disconnect Voice Mail Table PGM 234 DIGIT ITEM DEFAULT Not Used REMARK 1 VM Table 1 Prefix Put Mail Suffix 2 VM Table 2 Prefix Get Mail Suffix 3 VM Table 3 Prefix Suffix 4 VM Table 4 Prefix P 0P Suffix Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Voice Mail Dialing Table 234 2 123 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Voice Mail Table PGM 234 DIGIT ITEM DEFAULT REMARK 5 VM Table 5 Prefix No Answer Table P 4P Suffix 6 VM Table 6 Prefix Error Table P 5P Suffix 7 VM Table 7 Busy Table 8 VM Table 8 DND Table 9 VM TableQ Disconnect Table Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Mobile Extension Table 236 2 124 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Mobile Extension Table PGM 236
254. ting Value XFER Transfer Call REC Recall INC Incoming Call QUE Queued Call Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RS 232C Port Setting 174 1 82 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 You can set up the RS 232C port configuration Note Ifyou use COM2 as MODU MODEM interface the maximum speed is limited to 9600 bps If you use COM1 for PC Admin the maximum speed is limited to19200 bps Operation 1 Click RS 232C Port Setting Default 2515 values shown Refresh Close for each port Com Port Baud Rate CTS RTS Page Break LPP 1 199 19200 OFF OFF 60 19200 OFF OFF 60 2 Right click in the active area clickon 77 ue 0 xl Refresh Close the Update Tool button then change the values 3 Click on the Update Com Port Baud Rate CTS RTS Page Break LPP 1 199 button 19200 OFF OFF 60 19200 OFF OFF 60 Update Tool Baud Rate 13200 CTS RTS OFF m Page Break LPP 1 199 go Update Close Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 1 83 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Print Serial Port Selection PGM 175 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Baud Rate 0 7 19200 0 N A 1 N A 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400
255. tion Specific Ring 3 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 4 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Distinct CO Ring Frequency 422 1 161 Distinct CO Ring Frequency PGM 422 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Distinct CO Ring Frequency PGM422 m A user entered frequency may be changed to the SRefresh tClose closest system frequency available Operation un Click Distinct CO Ring Frequency and select Ringi T1 480 Hz LY the numbers as desired Ringi T2 H Ring2 Tl 400Hz Ring2 T2 Ring3 Ti 620H2 Ring 3 T2 0 Hz Ring 4 T1 770 Hz Is Ring 4 T2 0 Hz sd Distinct Ring Frequency PGM 422 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Ring 1 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 2 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 3 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Ring 4 0000 9999 T1 T2 Nation Specific Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 1 162 ACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 A user entered frequency may be changed to the closest system frequency Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin ACNR Tone Cadence PGM423 Refresh 5dupdate Close available Operation Ring Back Tone T1 ON 1 Click Tone Cadence Ring Back Tone T2 OFF 2 Enter atone cadence and press
256. tion number of the SLT port DID CO Ring 0 5 0 N A To assign external DID ring back tone set the Back Tone SLT station number of the SLT port Internal MOH 00 12 00 00 Romance Type Romance 01 Turkish March 02 03 04 05 06 07 Greensleeves Fur Elise Carmen Waltz Pavane Sichiliano 08 Sonata 09 Spring 10 Campanella 11 Badinerie 12 Blue Danube Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 PBX Access Code PGM 172 2 68 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro PBX Access Code PGM 172 You can make an outside call through the station A maximum of 4 PABX Access Codes are assignable PABX Access Code is a 1 or 3 digit number By default PABX Access Codes are not assigned PBX A sSRefresh yjupdate Close PBX Access Code PGM172 PBX Access Code 1 Max 2 digit include and PBX Access Code 2 Max 2 digit include and PBX Access Code 3 Max 2 digit include and PBX Access Code 4 Max 2 digit include and Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 PLA Preferred Line Answer Priority PGM 173 2 69 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro PLA Preferred Line Answer Priority PGM 173 You can set up which order of priority calls are to be received Operation Each item has the following meaning Place them in priority order to receive each call by their priority a Statens cet XFR Transf
257. to PGM 130 amp 250 When you use station base program items you must enter the station range Station I D Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 This menu is related with assigning the phone type for each station You can start the station main window for many programming First select the station list With this window you can select other sub menus such as station attribute or Flexible button assignment Operation1 1 Click Station List 2 Right click for other programming 3 Select the menu that you want to change Then you will see each different window for menu that you selected For example the following window displays station attributes E Station List Refresh S4update close Station ID PGM1 10 n 101 102 103 DKTU 105 oKTu Flex Button Assignment 106 107 SLT DTMF 108 SLT OTMF 109 SLT DTMF 110 SLT DTMF 111 SLT OTMF 112 WHTU 113 WHTU xj Station Information Station Number 104 Station KTU Associated Station Number Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 2 23 Station Attribute Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro xc Refresh update close Current Station Number Station Attributes PGM111 112 113 114 Attributes I PGM111 attributes rt PGM112 Attributes PGM113 Attribute ISD
258. ton Hot Warm Line PGM122 Z2 Refresh Close Station Idle Line Assign Type Value 101 Mot Assigned 102 Assigned Update Tool Station Idle Line Assign Type Value 102 Not Assigned m Values for Hot Warn Line Selection ITEM RANGE REMARK Flex Btn 01 48 To activate a feature on a flex button as if pressed COLine 01 12 To seize a CO Line CO Group 01 24 To seize a CO Line Group Station 100 131 To call another station 4 After setting data press the Update button in the Update Tool to save changes Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 SMDR Account Group 124 1 41 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin SMDR Account Group PGM 124 Stations can be assigned as a member of a call account group on SMDR A station belongs to only one call account group The system supports 24 SMDR Account Groups 0 23 Operation 1 Click SMDR Account Group SMDR Account Group PGMI24 Refresh Close Account Group Station 2 Click in the Account Group box to display a dropdown menu then select an Account Group 0 23 By default all stations are in group 0 Once stations are placed in a different group they cannot be deleted however they can be moved back into group 0 or another group as desired 3 Right click on Station or the adjacent area then click on the Update Tool button
259. ttribute I PGM141 CO Line Attribute II PGM142 Type Day Msg Night Msg Weekend Ms ISDN CO Line Attribute PGM143 1 Normal 0 0 CO Line Attribute PGM146 2 Normal 0 0 CID Attribute 147 Update Tool CO Num Type Ebo me Night Msg Weekend Msg Lunch Msg Msg Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 52 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin CO Service Type PGM140 DISA TYPES REMARK Normal CO All lines are assigned as normal CO lines by default Each CO line in the system can be programmed as a DISA Direct Inward System Access line and sub attributes can be programmed for the following time periods Flex Btn 1 Day 2 Night 3 Weekend 4 Lunch 5 On Demand Sub attributes for each period are F1 DISA Service On Off F2 VMIB Message No Voice announcement VMIB Message can be assigned 00 70 but by default it is not assigned 00 Reserved ISDN DID MSN Reserved us DCO DID DCO DID Line This type will be valid in a few countries For example Korea Release 3 5 WM veRTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 CO Related Admin PGM 140 141 142 143 146 147 1 53 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin The following CO Line Attributes window displays when you select the CO Attribute
260. ttributes PGM 382 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 First Access RSG CO ON OFF ON If the field is set the station on RSG can access a CO line on his RSG by dialing the CO Line access code in the 1st available CO group ex 9 7 Ring w o CO Ring ON OFF ON If the field is set stations on RSG will Assign receive the incoming CO ring even though the CO ring is not assigned IP Phone Attribute PGM 386 The following allows you to set the attributes of an IP Phone IP Phone Attribute BinNo IP Phone Attibute PGM386 NAT IP Address View NAT Port Num STUN Enabled CTI IP Address IPSEC Outside NAT Firewall a Release 3 5 Vv VERTICAL SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 IP Phone Attribute PGM 386 2 136 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro IP Phone Attributes PGM 386 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Set MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 A B 00 CB C MUTE D DND E FLASH F 2 IP Address Display 0 0 0 0 Display Only 3 Port View Display Only 4 Port Number Display Only 5 NAT IP Address Display 0 0 0 0 Display Only 6 NAT Port Number 0 Display Only 7 Stun Enabled None Display Only 8 CTI IP Address Skip 0 0 0 0 9 IPSEC Usage ON OFF OFF 10 Outside NAT Firewall ON OFF OFF 11 User ID Max of 12 Can be used by Nomad SP user characters 12 User Password Max of 12 Can be used by Nomad SP user characters Release 3 5 W veRTICAL SBX
261. u gt Login Dialog displays 2 If your PC is connected to the SBX IP system by a LAN select LAN Port Connect Connection Setting COM Port Connect For the LAN connection between the PC and the SBX IP system there must be a physical connection with 10BaseT Cable to local network and the SBX IP system and PC must have valid IP addresses Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Connection Menu 3 5 Chapter 3 Speed Editor CONDITIONS The SBX IP system and PC must have valid IP addresses If you want to connect directly you have to use cross UTP cable That means that the Transmit and Receive are cross But you connect the the SBX IP system and PC with a HUB you can use normal UTP cable that is used in your local network If you want to connect from a different segment of the LAN or from an external site via Internet the SBX IP system must have the correct gateway address default router If it doesn t have the gateway address remote connection using TCP IP will be not available If you want to connect the the SBX IP system that is used in remote site you may need help from the network administrator Because many site uses the firewall NAT PAT in their router to connect the system through the Internet help will be needed In a remote connection using the Internet connection speed stability is dependent on the environment of the WAN traffic or routing LA
262. um IP Phone Number 0 Y VOIB Slot Assignment for RSG IP Phone PGM 380 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 VOIB Slot for RSG IP Phone VOIB slot assignment for RSG IP Phone 2 RSG IP Channel Assign N A BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 RSG No 0 8 0 The IP Phone number to be serviced 2 IP Phone Number 00 16 00 from the system Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 1 152 RSG IP Phone Attribute PGM 382 The following is how to set the attributes of an RSG IP Phone Operation 1 Click RSG IP Phone Attribute 2 Select or check each field After setting press the Update button to save changes Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin RSG IP Attributes I PGM382 c Refresh Update Close Transfer Mode IP M Casting Mode Tone Generation Unicast m Remote ha Codec Type c 711 Peer To Peer 4 First Access RSG Ring w o CO Ring Assign M RSG IP Phone Attributes PGM 382 BTN ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Transfer Mode IP or MAC IP 2 Casting Mode Unicast or Multicast Unicast 3 Tone Generation Remote RSG IP Phone Remote 4 Peer to Peer ON OFF ON 5 Codec Type G 711_ALAW 0 G 711_ALAW 0 G 711_ULAW 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 G 729A 4 6 First Access RSG CO ON OFF ON If the field
263. up has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time Music Source 0 9 0 not If music source is assigned calling user will be heard assigned music instead of ring back tone 0 Not Assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 1 3 Reserved 4 SLT 1 5 SLT 2 6 SLT 3 7 SLT 4 8 SLT 5 9 Hold Tone Max Queue Call Count 00 99 99 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Supervisor Sta Supervisor station number Member Forward ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON members will be forwarded Queue Count Display ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON a Hunt member can check the Queue Count Release 3 5 vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 102 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Voice Mail Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six second
264. used to enable or disable the VMIB Announce 2 Enable Disable Repeat Overflow Destination Sta The call to a station in the group will continue to route until HUNT answered or each station in the group has been tried The VMIB call will remain at the last station in the group or will be SYS SPD passed to this overflow station group VMIB Overflow Timer 000 600 180 If this timer expires after a call comes into the group the sec call is routed to the overflow destination Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state for sec a minimum of six seconds after any call and for hunt group calls for the assigned wrap up time No Answer Timer 00 99 15 In circular hunt calls to a station in the group will go to the sec station if unavailable or unanswered in this no answer time the call is directed to the next station in the group Pilot Hunt ON OFF ON A circular hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number the station group so that only calls to the pilot number will hunt Alt if no Member ON OFF OFF If there is no member on duty an ICM call will be dropped or an incoming CO call will be routed to the Attendant Release 3 5 WM vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station Group Assign PGM 190 191 2 98 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Circular Terminal Group Attributes PGM 191 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Music Source 0 9 0 not If music source is assigned call
265. ver IP Address of the IP system The IP address is assigned by the network administrator If you don t want to use the network connection you might skip this feature But if you want to use a network connection you must configure this feature Enter the Client CLI IP Address optional 5 Enter the Gateway Address the IP Address of the gateway that the system uses If you do not enter the Gateway s IP Address you can not access the SBX IP system from another LAN segment that is separated by a router or 3 layer switch Note Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 by default Refresh update Close IP Name IP Test Server IP Address 172 19 15 88 CLI IP Address 0 0 0 0 GateWay IP Address 172 19 1 1 SUBNET Mask PPP Usage System Reset By Software Note f your network uses a firewall NAT Network Address Translation Port Address Translation you should contact your network administrator In that case you can t connect the SBX IP system using PC Admin software from a remote site not your network without your network administrator s help Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Board Attributes PGM 155 1 20 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Board Attributes PGM 155 You can program the board attributes of equipped board Operation 1 Configuration gt Select slot gt Board Attribute R2 CRC Check 2 If you select the slot number then R2 CRC
266. y telephone Override ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to override a CO line to gain access to the Privilege DISABLE conversation SMDR Hidden ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to hide CO dialing numbers from SMDR Dialed Digits DISABLE printing Voice Over ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE allows the station to use Voice Over feature DISABLE Warm Line HOT WARM This field is determined that Warm Line OFF or Hot Line ON in WARM PGM 122 VMIB MSG ON OFF OFF ON allows the station to use VMIB MSG Password attributes Password VMIB MSG ON OFF ON The allowance to use VMIB MSG Date Time ALARM ON OFF OFF Basic Alarm Attribute Mute Ring ON OFF ON Mute Ring Service configuration Service Call Cut Off 00 99 00 If the timer expires the call is released and the user receives a Timer disconnect tone Barge In Mode 0 2 0 0 OFF 1 Monitor Mode The intruding extension can listen to the existing conversation but cannot participate 2 Speech Mode The intruding extension can listen to and join to the existing conversation Auto Forward ON OFF ON to VMIB Release 3 5 W vertical SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Station ID Assignment PGM 110 111 112 113 114 1 28 Chapter 1 SBX IP Online PC Admin Station Attributes PGM113 ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station Port ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station is blocked and it is impossible to Block use that
267. y Code Table PGM 226 Regardless of STA COS an emergency call can be made through a service code You can make 10 service codes for emergency use Operation Click Emergency Code Table Emergency Code Table fri xl xc Refresh update Close Emergency Code Table PGM226 Id Value MAX 14 Digits Include D is Don t Care Release 3 5 veRTiCAU SBX IP PC Admin Guide June 2010 Authorization Code Table PGM 227 2 114 Chapter 2 SBX IP Offline PCAdminPro Authorization Code Table PGM 227 Authorization code table entries consist of each station password and extra account codes The table entry from 001 to the maximum capacity of station numbers are saved as the password of each station The remaining are extra entries CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access until a matched Authorization code is entered In this case DND warning tone is provided when the CO Line Group access code is dialed If the dialed Authorization code is verified you will hear CO dial tone Otherwise you will hear an error tone and you cannot access the group Stations or Admin programming can enter the authorization codes An authorization code is a flexible length from 3 digits to 11 digits The Administrator can see and change a station s password There can be no duplicate entries By default Authorization Codes are not assigned Operation Click Authorization Code Table If a password is registered in the system

Vertical SBX IP PC Admin 3.5

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents